AT-900C - Numeric keypad ROLAND - Free user manual and instructions

★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 7.0/10 📄 300 pages PDF ⬇️ EN 💬 AI Question 🖨️ Print

USER MANUAL AT-900C ROLAND

Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p. 3), and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 6). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, Owner’s manual should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference. Copyright © 2007 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.

The lighning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product enclosure that may be of suficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:

1. Read these instructions. 10.

2. Keep these instructions.

3. Heed all wamings.

4. Follow all instructions. 11.

5. Do not use this apparatus near water.

6. Clean only with a dry cloth. 12.

7. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 18.

9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. À polarized plug has two blades with 14. one wider than the other. À grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fi into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. For the U.K.

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol Qor coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

[ INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS | About À\ WARNING and /\ CAUTION Notices About the Symbols Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe AWARNING |injury should the unit be used improperly. Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly. À CAUTION

• Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings, as well to domestic animals or pets. The À symbol alerts the user to important instructions or Warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is /\ [determined by the design contained within the triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger. The © symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that © must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the unit must never be disassembled. The @ symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out. The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power- cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet. pense ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING --------- [ AWARNING | [ WARNING | Safety grounding connection Connect mains plug of this model to a mains socket outlet with a safety grounding connection.

Do not disassemble or modi Do not disassemble or modify this device. © Do not repair or replace parts Never attempt to repair this device or replace parts. If repair or part replacement should become necessary, you must contact your dealer or a Roland service center.

Do not use or store in the following types of locations Locations of extremely high temperature {such as in direct sunlight, near heating equipment, or on a device that generates heat] Near moisture [such as in a bathroom, near a sink, or on a wet floor] or in locations of high humidity Locations exposed to rain Locations of excessive dust Locations subject to heavy vibration Do not place in an unstable location tilted surface. You must place it in a stable and level location. Do not place this device on an unstable stand or a O Connect the power cord to an outlet of the correct voltage You must connect the power cord to an AC ouilet of the correct voltage as marked on the device. Use only the included power cord You must use only the power cord included with the O device. Do not use the included power cord with any other device. onit heavy objects on the power cord. Doing so will damage the power cord, and may cause short circuits or faulty connections, possibly resulting in fire or electrical shock. Do not bend the power cord excessively, or place S Do not share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Do not connect excessive numbers of electrical devices to a single power outlet. In particular, Q when using a power strip, exceeding the rated capacity [Wwatis/amps] of the power strip may cause heat to be generated, possibly melting the cable. Avoid ex This device, either by itself or used in conjunction with headphones, amps, and/or speakers, is Q capable of producing volume levels that can cause permanent hearing damage. If you experience impaired hearing or ringing in your ears, immedli- ately stop using the device and consult a medical specialist. Do not insert foreign objects Never allow foreign objects (flammable objects, coins, wires, elc.] to enter this device. This can cause short circuits or other malfunctions.

[ A\WARNING | À CAUTION | Turn off the power if an abnormality or malfunction occurs If any of the following should oceur, immediately turn off the power, disconnect the power cord from the AC ouilet, and contact your dealer or a service center to have the device serviced. + The power cord is damaged + The device produces smoke or an unusual smell + A foreign object enters the device, or liquid spills into the device + The device becomes wet {by rain, etc.) + An abnormality or malfunction oceurs in the device out supervision Do not allow children to use wi In households with children, take particular care against tampering, If children are to use this device, VAN they must be supervised or guided by an adult. Do not drop or subject to strong impact Do not drop this device or subject it to strong impact. Do not use overseas If you wish to use this device overseas, please contact your dealer or a service center. Do not use a CD-ROM DVD player audio CD player or DVD player, the resulting high IF you attempt to play back a CD-ROM in a conventional S volume may damage your hearing or your speakers. Do not place containers of water on the device Do not place containers of water {such as a flower vase) or drinks on the device. Nor should you place containers of insecticide, perfume, alcoholic liquids, naïl polish, or spray cans on the device. Liquids that spill into the device may cause it to malfunction, and may cause short circuits or faulty operation. Never expose Battery to excessive heat Never expose Battery to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. Place in a well ventilated location When using this device, ensure that it is placed in ( a well ventilated location. Grasp the plug when connecting or disconnecting the power cord When connecting or disconnecting the power cord to/from an AC outlet or the device itself, you must S grasp the plug, not the cord. Period ally wipe the dust off the power cord plug From time to time, you should unplug the power cord from the AC outlet and use a dry cloth to wipe O the dust off of it. You should also unplug the power cord from the AC outlet if you will not be using the device for an extended period of time. Dust or dirt that accumulates between the power cord plug and the AC outlet can cause a short circuit, possibly resulting in fire. Manage cables for safety Ensure that the connected cables are organized and managed in a safe manner. In particular, place the cables out of reach of children.

Do not stand or place heavy objects on this device Do not stand on this device, or place heavy objects S on it. Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands Do not connect or disconnect the power cord to the «a device or AC ouilet while holding the power cord @ plug with wet hands. {For AT-900C) Cautions when moving this device If you need to move the instrument, take note of the precautions listed below. Since this product is very heavy, you must make sure that a sufficient number of people are on hand to help, so you can lift and move it safely, without causing strain. lt should be handled caretully, all the while keeping it level. Make sure to have a firm grip, to protect yourself from injury and the instrument from damage. + Check whether the knob bolts fastening the device to its stand have become loose. If they are loose, tighten them firmly. Disconnect the power cord. Disconnect external devices. Remove the music stand.

À CAUTION | À CAUTION | (For AT-900) Cautions when moving this device Before moving the unit, disconnect the power plug from the outlet, and pull out all cords from external devices. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before cleaning Before you clean the device, turn offthe power and unplug the power cord from the AC ouilet [p. 23]. € Ithere is a possibility of lighining strike, Co disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet If there is a possibility of lighining strike, immedi- ately turn off the power and disconnect the power = cord from the AC ouilet. Cautions when us g battei s recily. Please observe the following cautions (p. 251). + When inserting batteries, carefully observe the Q correct polarity ['+" and “"]. Do not mix new and partially used batteries, or O batteries of different types. Batteries may leak or burst if they are used incor- à IF you will not be using the device for an extended period of time, remove the batteries. IF the batteries have leaked, use a soft dry cloth to carefully wipe the liquid off the battery compartment, and install new batteries. If liquid that leaks from a battery contacts your skin, it may cause skin irritation. Battery liquid that gets into your eye is dangerous; immediately wash out your eye with water. Do not carry or store batteries together with metallic objects such as pens, necklaces, or hairpins. {For AT-900) Cautions when opening/closing the lid Be careful when opening/closing the lid so you do not get your fingers pinched (p. 22). Adult super- vision is recommended whenever small children use the unit. Cautions when using the seat You must observe the following cautions when using the seat. + Do not play with the seat or use it as a stepstool. + Do not allow two or more people to sit on the A seat simultaneously. + Do not sit on the seat if the bolts fastening the legs are loose. (If they are loose, use the included tool to retighten them.) +_ {For AT-900] When opening or closing the seat lid, be careful not to pinch your fingers. In particular, be careful not to pinch your fingers in the folding metal supports. {p. 27) ms out of the reach of children Keep small being swallowed accidentally, keep them out of the reach of children. To prevent small items such as the following from O + Included items + Screws for assembling the music rest Screws for attaching the music rest Cap for the stand screws on the rear of the AT-900C Stopper for the pedal keyboard included with the AT- 900C stand Stopper screws for the pedal keyboard included with the AT-900C stand AT-900C stand assembly screws Do not remove the speaker grille and speaker by any means. Speaker not user replaceable. Shock hazardous voltages and currents are present inside the enclosure.

• GS (@$) is a registered trademark of Roland Corporation.

• XG lite { XI] is a registered trademark of Yamaha

Corporation. *_ AIl product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

IE AT-900_e.book 6X— 2007Æ9A7H &HA FA8#H439 Important Notes Power Supply Do not connect this device to the same electrical outlet as an inverter-controlled device such as a refrigerator, microwave oven, or air conditioner, or a device that contains an electric motor. Depending on how the other device is used, power supply noise could cause this device to malfunction or produce noise. If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet, please connect this device via a power supply noise filter + _ Batteries are included with this device. These batteries are for the purpose of testing the operation of this device, and their life span may be shorter than normal. + Before you make connections, you must switch off the power on all devices to prevent malfunction and/or speaker damage. + Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the Power switch is switched off, this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power. If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the Power switch, then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. For this reason, the ouilet into which you choose to connect the power cord's plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily accessible. Location +_IFthis device is placed near devices that contain large transformers, such as power amps, hum may be induced in this device. If this occurs, move this device farther away or change its orientation. +_IFthis device is operated near a television or radio, color distortion may be seen in the television screen or noise may be heard from the radio. If this occurs, move this device farther away. Keep your cell phone powered off or at a suficient distance from this device. If a cell phone is nearby, noise may be heard when a call is received or initiated, or during conversation + Do not leave this device in direct sunlight, near devices that produce heat, or in a closed-up automobile. Do not allow illumination devices operated in close proximity {such as a piano light} or powerful spotlights to shine on the same location on this device for an extended time. This can cause deformation or color change. +_ IF you move this device between locations of radically different temperature or humidity, water droplets (condensation) may form inside the device. Using the device in this condition will cause malfunctions, so please allow several hours for the condensation to disappear before you use the device. +_ Do not allow items made of rubber or vinyl to remain on top of this device for an extended time. This can cause deformation or color change. + Do not leave objects on top of the keyboard. This can cause malfunctions such as failure to sound. +_ Do not affix adhesive labels to this device. The exterior finish may be damaged when you remove the labels. + (AT-200C) Depending on the material and temperature of the surface on which you place the unit, its rubber feet may discolor or mar the surface.You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet to prevent this from happening. If you do so, please make sure that the unit will not slip or move accidentally. Care + _ For everyday care, wipe with a soft dry cloth, or remove stubborn dirt using a tighily wrung-out cloth. IFthis device contains wooden components, wipe the entire area following the direction of the grain. The finish may be damaged if you continue strongly rubbing a single location +_lf water droplets should adhere to this device, immediately wipe them off using a soft dry cloth. + Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, or alcohol, since these can cause deformation or color change. Servicing +_lF you return this device for servicing, the contents of memory may be lost. Please store important contents on USB memory, or make a note of the contents. We take utmost care to preserve the contents of memory when performing service, but there may be cases when the stored content cannot be recovered because the memory section has malfunctioned. Please be aware that we cannot accept responsibility for the recovery of lost memory content or for any consequences of such loss. Other Cautions + Stored content may be lost due to a malfunction of the device or because of inadvertent operation. You should back up important content on USB memory as a safeguard against such loss. + We cannot accept responsibility for the recovery of any content lost from internal memory or USB memory, or for the & consequences of such loss.

+ Do not apply excessive force to the buttons, knobs, or input/ output jacks, since this may cause malfunctions. + Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display. + When connecting or disconnecting cables, grasp the plug (not the cable] to prevent short circuits or broken connections. + _ This device may produce a certain amount of heat, but this is not a malfunction +_ Please enjoy your music in ways that do not inconvenience other people nearby, and pay particular attention to the volume at nighttime. Using headphones will allow you to enjoy music without having to be concerned about others. + When transporting or shipping this device, package it in an appropriate amount of cushioning material. Scratches, damage, or malfunctions may occur if you transport it without appropriate packaging. +_lFusing the music rest, do not apply excessive force to it. + Some connection cables contain a resistor. Do not connect such cables to this device. Doing so may make the volume extremely low or inaudible. Please use connection cables not containing a resistor. «(For AT-900) Before opening or closing the keyboard lid, always make sure that no pets or oïher small animals are located on top of the instrument [in particular, they should be kept away from the keyboard and its lid). Otherwise, due to the structural design of this instrument, small pets or other animals could end up getting trapped inside it. If such a situation is encountered, you must immediately switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the ouilet. You should then consult with the retailer from whom the instrument was purchased, or contact the

IE AT-900_e.book 7 K— 2007Æ9A7H &HA FA8H439 Important Notes nearest Roland Service Center. The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change depending on the amount of light in the vicinity of the unit. IF it does not function as you expect, adjust the sensitivity as appropriate for the brighiness of your location. In order to provide the highest possible image quality, the ATELIER uses a TFT liquid crystal display. Due to the nature of a TFT liquid crystal display, the screen may contain pixels that fail to light or that remain constantly lit, but please be aware that this is not a malfunction or defect. {For AT-900C) IF you play at an excessive volume, a protection circuit will operate, causing the sound from the speakers to be temporarily muted. If this occurs, please lower the volume. Floppy Disk Handling {Using Optional Floppy Disk Drive) + Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface area. To preserve their integrity, please observe the following when handling Roppy disk: Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk. + Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas. + Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes {e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recommended temperature range: 10-50 degrees C [50-122 degrees F]. + Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields, such as those generated by loudspeakers. Floppy disks have a “write protect” tab which can protect the disk from accidental erasure. lt is recommended that the tab be kept in the PROTECT position, and moved to the WRITE position only when you wish to write new data onto the disk. = Rear side of the disk

Write (can write new data onto disk) Protect Write Protect Tab\ {prevents writing to disk) The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk. Should the label come loose while the disk is in the drive, it may be difficult to remove the disk. Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them, and to protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards. By using a dirty or dustridden disk, you risk damaging the disk, as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction. USB Memory Handling + When connecting USB memory, firmly insert it all the way in. + Do not touch the pins of the USB memory connector, or allow them to become dirty. USB memory is made using high-precision electronic components, so please observe the following points when handling it + _ To prevent damage from static electrical charges, discharge any static electricity that might be present in your body before handling USB memory. + Do not touch the terminals with your fingers or any metal object. +_ Do not bend or drop USB memory, or subject it to strong impact. + Do not leave USB memory in direct sunlight or in locations such as a closed-up automobile. [Storage temperature: 0-50 degrees C} + Do not allow USB memory to become wet. +_Do not disassemble or modify USB memory. + When connecting USB memory, position it horizontally with the external memory connector and insert it without using excessive force. The external memory connector may be damaged if you use excessive force when inserting USB memory. + Do not insert anything other than USB memory {e.g., wire, coins, other types of device] into the external memory connector. Doing so will damage the external memory connector Do not apply excessive force to the connected USB memory. If you will not be using USB memory for an extended period of time, close the USB memory cover. Handling the CDs (CD-ROMs) When handling the discs, please observe the following. +_ Do not touch the encoded surface of the disc. + Do not use in dusty areas. + Do not leave the disc in direct sunlight or an enclosed vehicle. + _Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside [encoded surface] of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM discs may not be read properly. Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner. + Keep the disc in the case. + Do not keep the disc in the CD drive for a long time + Do not put a sticker on the label of the disc + Wipe the disc wilh a soft and dry cloth radially from inside to outside. Do not wipe along circumference. + Do not use benzine, record cleaner spray or solvents of any kind. + Do not bend the disc. Bending discs may prevent proper reading and writing of data, and may further result in malfunction Copyright + This product can be used to record or duplicate audio or visual material without being limited by certain technological copy- protection measures. This is due to the fact that this product is intended to be used for the purpose of producing original music or video material, and is therefore designed so that material that does not infringe copyrights belonging to others (for example, your own original works) can be recorded or duplicated freely. + Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party. We assume no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third-party copyrights arising through your use of this unit.

CIE AT-900_e.book 8X— 2007Æ9A7H &HA FH8#439 ll Main Features We want lo take a moment to thank you for your purchase of the Roland Organ “Music ATELIER.” The ATELIER is an electronic organ which provides a generous collection of rich organ sounds. In addition, it is designed to be easy to learn and use. In order to enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard for many years to come, please take the time to read through this manual in its entirety.

• The AT-900 and AT-900C are abbreviated in this manual as “ATELIER” respectively. Basic Concepts of the ATELIER Series A full complement of organ sounds A wide range of basic organ sounds, ranging from jazz organ and pipe organ to theatre organ, are onboard so you are sure to enjoy having access to all the sounds you expect from an organ. Panel layout based on a tradition of emphasis on realtime operation Based on the idea that you should be able to sit down and begin playing immediately, the operation buttons of the panel are arranged by function as dictated by classic organ traditions, ensuring easy and intuitive operation. All models of the ATELIER series feature the same operability, allowing you to start playing immediately even if you switch models. High-quality sounds that you can use without editing In addition to a full range of organ sounds, high-quality sounds such as strings and brass are also included onboard. You can simply select sounds and enjoy playing the organ—no need to perform complicated editing operations.

Expansive lower keyboard with damper pedal for piano-like expressiveness The piano is indispensable to contemporary music performance. All models of the ATELIER series contain high-quality grand piano sounds that you will enjoy performing. In addition, the range of the lower keyboard has been expanded, giving you greater expressive capabilities on the piano. À damper pedal and initial touch sensitivity are also provided, both necessities for piano performance. Design utilizes your existing music data The ATELIER series is designed so that even on new models, you will feel right at home and can begin playing immediately. Consideration has been given to data compatibility, and existing song data or registration data can be moved to USB memory or used by connecting a floppy disk drive. Music styles from around the world Many of the bestloved musical styles from around the world {rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns} are built in, allowing you to enjoy an international range of performances. Utilizes SMF music files Compatible with General MIDI 2, the world standard in SMF music files. Since an external memory connector is provided, you can connect separately available USB memory or a floppy disk drive and take advantage of the wide range of commercially available SMF music files. You can also mute parts, allowing you to practice the part for each hand separately, and enjoy performing ensemble with the music files.

IE AT-900_e.book 9K— 2007Æ9A7H &HA FH8#H439 Main Features Features Harmonic bars for creating organ sounds The organ is equipped with “Harmonie bars,” which are much like the controllers used on traditional jazz organs. By operating the harmonic bars, you can easily create a diverse variety of organ sounds. By using the solo harmonic bars you can add orchestral sounds to the organ sounds for even more expressive performance potential. Redglistically expressing acoustic instrument performances (Articulation Voice) In order to bring out the distinctive qualities of an acoustic instrument and perform in a musically significant way, it is essential to make use of the instrument's rich variety of tonal changes and diverse performance techniques {articulations]. The ATELIER contains “Articulation Voices," which use Super Natural technology to realistically express the sounds and performance techniques of these acoustic instruments. For even more richly expressive performances, you can take advantage of aftertouch or a foot switch to modify the tone in various ways while you play. Super Natural technology Super WATURAL Proprietary Roland sound generation technology that redlistically reproduces the tonal changes and performance techniques distinctive of an acoustic instrument, allowing you to perform music that is natural and richly expressive. USB Memory You can connect separately sold USB memory or a floppy disk drive, and play back SMF music files. Performances you record or registration data you create can also be saved on USB memory or a floppy disk, or you can save SMF music files or registrations from USB memory or a floppy disk into internal user memory. “Quick Registration” and “Music Assistant” functions The “Quick Registration” function lets you use keywords to select wonderful registrations created by top-ranking organists such as Hector Olivera. The “Music Assistant” function makes it easy to recall appropriate rhythm and sound settings simply by selecting a desired atmosphere for your song. Highly realistic rhythms and automatic accompaniment functions AI rhythms use data from performances by professional drummers, featuring high-quality patterns with all the grooves and subile nuance of the real thing. In addition, you can use automatic accompaniments that are perfecily matched to each rhythm to enjoy the feeling of playing with your own band in the background. Human voices and phrases In addition to a full array of organ sounds, the ATELIER series provides human voices such as “Jazz Scat,” and human voice phrases such as “Amen.” Active Expression sounds For some of the sounds, moving the expression pedal will vary not only the volume but also the tone, or add other sounds. From pianissimo to fortissimo, the tonal character of the sound itself will change as you perform a crescendo, or strings may appear behind the piano, creating dynamic changes in tonality.

IE AT-900_e.book 10 K—> 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 Main Features Harmony Intelligence The Harmony Intelligence function automatically adds harmony to the upper keyboard sound according to the chord you play in the lower keyboard. This gives you greater tonal depth and a more powerful performance. 76-note lower keyboard for plenty of range The 76-note range can be split into zones, allowing a solo voice, pedal bass voice, percussion, etc., to be played independently for an even wider range of performance possibilities. Since the lower keyboard can be divided into a maximum of four parts, you have at your command expressive power that rivals that of a three-manual organ. In addition, you can use the Drums/SFX function to play drum sounds or sound effects from the entire lower keyboard. Connect external speakers for even greater presence Using the Aux Out jack, the accompaniment parts and an enveloping ambience of RSS reverb sound can be played through external speakers to create the impression that you're playing along with a band or orchestra. By outputting the drums and bass separately from the other sounds, you'll also be able to adjust the volume balance during a concert. Large, wide LCD For convenience, the frame area of the wide LCD screen always displays buttons for frequenily used functions. You can also view the tempo and measure number in any screen. The color liquid-crystal touch panel ensures excellent visibility and easy operability. Conventions Used in This Manual This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler, more concise instructions. + The AT-900 and AT-900C are abbreviated in this manual as “ATELIER” respectively. + In this manual, an illustration of the AT-900 is sometimes used for explanatory purposes. + Button names are enclosed in square brackets ["[ ]"), as in [Drums/SFX] button. + On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets “< >", as in <Exit>. + [A] [VI], [<<] [» ] means that you should press one or the other button. Example: Reverb [A] [W] buttons, Tempo [ « ] [» ] buttons. + For easier readability, some screens and colors used here may differ in part from actual screens and colors. + The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called “touching.” + An asterisk [*) or a at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or precaution. These should not be ignored. + (p. **) refers to pages within the manual.

Selecting and Playing Sounds. cree A7 Selecting Voices About the Voices and Parts Functions of the Upper/Lower/Pedal Bass Sound Select Buttons . Selecting the Upper and Lower Voices Selecting Pedal Bass Voice Selecting Solo Voice Selecting a Voice Using the [Others] Button . Creating Organ Sounds [Vintage Organ) . Playing a Vintage Organ Voice … Realistically Expressing an Acoustic Instrument Performance (Articulation Voice] Selecting a Articulation Voice Performing with an Articulation Voice. Using Aftertouch or the Expression Pedal Making the Ideal Settings for Playing an Articulation Voici Tips for Performing with an Articulation Voice . Performing with an Active Expression Voice . Performing with a Human Voice Adjust the Volume Balance Transpose the Pitch in Octave Units (Octave Shift Playing Drum Sounds or Sound Effects from the Entire Lower Keyboard (Drums/SFX). Changing Drums/SFX Sets Playing a Lower Voice with Percussion Instrument Sounds and a Voice Phrase [Manual Percussion] .78 rs Changing the Manual Percussion Sets … Sustaining Notes in the Lower Part (Lower Hold) .

Using Rhythm Performance .. Selecting a Rhythm. Using Rhythms Stored in User Memory Rhythm Search Playing Rhythm Starting at the Press of a Button Starting the Rhythm Automatically When You Play the Lower Keyboard or Pedalboard {Sync Start) Stopping the Rhythm Changing a Rhythm's Tempo Playing the Count Sound at the End of the Intro … Playing Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment.. Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and Accompaniment (Variation Playing Chords with Simple Fingering (Chord Intelligence) Leading Bass Function A Simple Way to Make Automatic Accompaniment Settings (One Touch Program) Using a Rhythm from a USB Memory. Reviewing the Rhythms on USB Memory Copying Rhythms Changing the Order of the Saved Rhythms Renaming a Saved Rhythm Deleting Saved Rhythm... | 12

Storing Registrations… Recalling a Registration . How to Recall a Registration [DELAYED) … How to Recall a Registration (INSTANT) Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations Automatically Registering When You Switch Panel Setting .110 Assigning a Name to a Registration Set .111 Saving Registration Sets . .113 Loading Previously Saved Registration Sets Into the ATELIER. .116 Loading a Set of Registrations .116 Loading an Individual Registration .117 Recalling the Order that the Registrations are Saved (Load Next} .120 Deleting a Set of Registrations .122 Changing the Name or Order of Registratio .124 Copying Registrations 127 Using the Performance Functions ….................................................…. 130

• Transposing to a Different Key [Key Transpose] Adjusting the Brighiness of the Sound Adding Decay to the Sound (Damper Pedal) Using the Pitch Bend/Vibrato Lever Using the Foot Switches. Changing the Function of the Foot Switch. Using the Foot Switch to Switch Registrations Adjusting the Overall Volume Using an Expression Pedal .136 Adjusting the Depth of the Expression Pedal… p. 137
• Applying Various Effects to the Sound .…… . 138 Adding Harmony to a Melody (Harmony Intelligence) ….138 Changing the Harmony Intelligence Type p. 139
• Adding Modulation to the Sound (Rotary Effect) p. 141
• Making Fine Adjustments to the Rotary Effect Speed [Rotary Speed) .142 Changing the Brightness of the Rotary Effect (Rotary Color .143 Adding Richness to the Sound (Chorus Effect] .144 Adding Resonance to the Sound {Sustain Effect .146 Changing the Sustain Length .148 Adding Reverberation to the Sound {Reverb Effect) Changing the Reverb Type .150 p. 149

Changing the Wall Type Changing the Depth of the Reverb Using the D Beam Controller for Additional Enjoymen .154 Modifying the Sound .154 Moving Your Hand Above the D Beam Controller to Produce a Sound Effect. .155

Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively . Making Effective Use of the Lower Keyboard. Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard [Solo [To Lower] Button) Changing How the Solo Voice Responds.. .159 Layering the Solo Voice and Lower Voice. .159 Changing the Solo Split Point .160 Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice [[Bass Split] Button] .161 Changing the Bass Split Point .162 Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice (Pedal [To Lower] Button] 163

Recording/Playing Back What You Play … What is a Track Button? … Displaying the Track Buttons Playing Back Performance Songs Stored on USB Memory and SMF Music File: Silencing a Specific Track (Track Mute] Muting Individual Tracks of Performance Data. .170 Viewing a Notation .171 Changing the Notation Settings .172 Recording a Performance .174 Playing Back a Performance Song . .175 Add a Count Sound to Match the Timing (Count In} .175

Recording Each Part Separately Re-Recording Erasing a Performance Song (Song Clear) Changing the Name of a Performance Song (Rename] Saving Performance Songs Loading Performance Songs Into the ATELIER Deleting Performance Songs Stored on “Favorites” or the USB Memory Layering a New Recording onto SMF Music Files Using Song with a Different Tempo Than That of the Performance Song Re-Recording Part of Your Performance {Punch-in Recording} Recording and Layering Drum Parts (Loop Recording]. Starting recording at the right moment (Count-In Recording) . Copying Performance Song …….… Creating a Folder in USB Memory. Editing Your Musical Performance Data ….....................................… 190 Deleting a Specific Measure (Delete Measure).…. .190 Delete the Recording from a Track [Delete Track) .191 Erase Recording (Erase Eveni) .193 Copying Measures (Copy) .195 Correct Timing Inaccuracies (Quantizs .196 l 14

Preparations for Creating User Rhythms Displaying the Rhythm Customize Screen Selecting the Division. Loading the Rhythm … Making the Division Settings Creating the User Rhythm . Editing the Rhythm Changing and Deleting the Instruments Used Deleting Rhythms You Have Created Saving the User Rhythm Changing the Name of a User Rhythm (Rename] Saving User Rhythms to the User Memory or USB Memory Various Other Settings... 209 Adjusting How the Instrument Responds . .209 Turning Aftertouch On/Off .209 Adjusting the Depth of Aftertouch .209 Adjusting the Initial Touch Sensitivity … .210 Changing the Pedalboard Polyphony. .210 Performance Function Settings .211 Selecting the keyboard affected by the damper pedal .211 Changing the Function of the Expression Pedal .211 Choosing the keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will appl .212 Changing the Pitch Bend Range .213

Adjusting the Sensitivity of the D Beam Controller Rhythm Settings... Turning Chord Hold On/Of Changing the Intro Countdown Sound (Count Down Sound) Preventing Rhythm Tempos from Switching Automatically Changing the Operation of the Fill In Button and Intro/Ending Buttons Registration Settings … Changing the Timing at Which Arranger Settings are Recalled .. Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled Composer Settings Switching the Display of Lyrics On or OF .218 Changing the Key When Playing Back Songs (Play Transpose) .218 Changing the Metronome Setting .219 Adjusting the Metronome Volume .219 Changing the Sound of the Metronome . .220 Setting the Beat .220 Other Settings .221 Adjust the Standard Pitch (Master Tune] .221 Adjusting the mic echo .221

Enabling Transmission of PC Numbers Setting the PC Numbe .222 MIDI IN Mode .223 Selecting the MIDI Transmit Channel .223 Adjusting the Brighiness of the Display .224

Eliminating the Bouncing Ball from the Main Screen

• Contents Switching the Background of the Main Screen. Changing the External Memory Settng . Turning the Remote Function On/Off Changing the Functions of the Remote Control's Buttons Using the V-LINK function …. Repositioning the Touch Screen Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings Restoring All Settings Other Than the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings Formatting a USB Memory (Format) Displaying a Graphic at Power-up Deleting an Image Stored in Internal Memory. Copying Data from a Floppy Disk to USB Memory. Video-related Settings Specifying the Television Forma Selecting the Aspect Ratio of the Video Output Selecting the Type of Slide Show Selecting the Interval at which Images will Change
• Connecting with External Device p. 240
• Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors Connecting to Audio Equipment Connecting an amp to produce sound [AT-900C) Connecting a Computer Making the Settings for the USB Drive Connecting MIDI Devices Connecting an External Display or Television Changing the settings when external speakers are connected Switching the Aux Out On/OF Switching the Aux Out Mode Using the Remote … Installing Batteries in the Remot Using the Remote Remote Control Button p. 4

Enjoying Music and Video... Performing with a Background Image from a Video Camera Performing with a Background Image from a DVD Player Enjoying Powerful Sound and Big-screen Playback from Your Portable Audio/Video Player ….260 Freely Switching Between Images Enjoying VIMA TUNES Songs …. Listening to a VIMA TUNES Song Displaying a Slide Show while the Song Plays Performing with Sounds that Maich the Song (Recommended Tones| Listening to Songs from Music CD Enjoying Karaoke with a Music CD (Center Cancel | 16

Before You Start Playing Attaching the Pedalboard Attaching the Pedalboard (AT-900) (AT-900C)

1. Detach the pedal cord that is temporarily A PK series pedal keyboard [sold separately) can be

fastened to the board on the upper part of the connected to the AT-700C. Expression Pedal. The AC adaptor supplied with the pedal keyboard is not used. The pedalboard wil be turned on/off by the power switch of the AT-900C, regardless of the position of the pedalboard's

2. Connect the pedal cord to the connector own power sich : :

located at the right side of the Pedalboard. 1. Make sure that the AT-900C and pedal keyboard (PK seri red off.

3. Firmly tighten the screws of the pedal cable’s eyboard (PK series) are powered o

plug. 2. Use the PK cable that is supplied with the AT- 900€ to connect the AT-900C's PK IN connector

4. Slide the Pedalboard firmly all the way back to the pedalboard's PK OUT connector.

so that it is secure and unable to move. ® ea I C ELA

7 Screw Once the connections have been completed, turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction ; d/or d to speakers and ofher devices. Do not remove the fastener located near the Expression and/or damage to speakers and ofher devices Pedal. Before transporting the AT-900, be sure to wind up 3. Turn on the power of the AT-900C lp. 24). the pedal cable so that there is no slack, and attach it to the fastener. 4. Make sure that the indicator on the rear panel of the pedalboard is lit. Play the pedalboard. If you hear the pedal part of the ATELIER, connections are complete. This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval [a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate normally. manual of the pedal keyboard. For details on aftaching the pedal keyboard and assembling MED For details on pedal keyboard settings, refer to the owner's the stand, refer to the leaflet that describes how to assemble the stand.

IE AT-900_e.book 21 K— 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA4 35 Before You Start Playing Setting Up the Music Rest Attaching the Music Rest (AT-900) T Insert the supplied screws for the music rest into the screw holes located on the top of the instrument, and lighily tighten them [two locations).

2. Put the music rest between the screws and the

3. While supporting the music rest with one

hand, secure it in place by turning the screws. When attaching the music rest, support it firmly with one hand to make sure that you don't drop it. Be careful, so you don't get your fingers pinched.

4. To set up the music stand, always use both hands

to lift the base, and pull it gently toward yourself. Do not apply excessive force to the installed music rest. Be sure to use the supplied screws for attaching the music rest. Before moving the piano, be sure to remove the music rest to prevent accidents. Attaching the Music Rest (AT-900C)

Place the music rest on top of the AT-900C and align the screw hole locations. Insert the included music stand fastening screws into the screw holes of the music stand, and loosely tighten them [two locations).

Put the music rest between the screws and the ATELIER's body.

While supporting the music rest with one hand, secure it in place by turning the screws. When attaching the music rest, support it firmly with one hand to make sure that you don't drop it. Be careful, so you don't get your fingers pinched. Removing the Music Rest

To remove the music rest, support it with one hand while loosening the screws. Remove the music rest. After removing the music rest, don't forget to retighten the screws.

Before You Start Playing Connecting the Speaker Cable Opening/Closing the Lid (AT-900C) (AT-900) T. Plug the speaker cable extending from the stand into the Speaker connector located at SR the rear of the AT-900C's bottom panel. Pay attention to the shape of the speaker cable's connector, and insert it until you hear it click securely into place. î î T. To open the lid, hold handles with both hands and lift it straight up. Then, slide it to the rear.

2. To close the lid, slowly pull it forward until it

stops. Then, genily lower it into place. Be careful not to get your fingers caught when opening or closing the lid. Adult supervision is recommended when & > small children are going to be using the instrument. æ To prevent accidents, be sure to close the lid before moving the organ Make sure you don't have anything (such as sheet music) on the keyboard when you close the lid.

Ée = LIU II l 1 Before You Start Playing About the Adjuster (AT-900) Connecting the Power Cord If you feel that the ATELIER has become unstable, for example 1. First, make sure that the [Power On] switch at after moving it to another location, turn the adjuster located on Ur, si: : the bottom of the stand's legs as shown in the following. the panel's lefi side is OFF (not pushed in). + Rotate the adjustor to lower it so that it is in firm contact Upper position El] With the floor. Make adjustments so that there is no gap < between the adiuster and the floor. In particular, when ñ placing the ATELIER on carpet, turn the adjuster so that it Power on OFF 3 is firmly in contact with the floor. È

2. Connect the supplied power cord to the AC à

The legs of the AT-900/s bench also have adjusters. IFthe Inlet connector, then plug the other end into an bench is unstable, you can adjust its adjusters. AC outlet. When turning the adjuster, be careful not to pinch your ED ki Re Baaoc)

Power Cord Only use the power cord supplied with this instrument. Whenever you do not intend to use the instrument for extended periods of time, pull out the power cord from the AC ouilet.

Before You Start Playing

3. Adjust the volume to an appropriate level by

Tur g ne Power and Of moving the [Master Volumel slider or operating the expression pedal. Once the connections have been completed, turn on or off Now adjust the [Master Volume] slider to a suitable power to your various devices in the order specified. By : : : ï Hd in d " level. The volume will be increased when the Expression vrning on or off devices in Ie wrong order, you ris Pedal is pressed down, and decreased when the pedal causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other | nou is returned. Turning On the Power pense d the volume E T. Make sure of the following before the power is à turned on. decrecse ïm the volume peser +_ls the power cord correctly connected to the AC inlet2 Volume +_ Is the power cord correcily connected to the AC outlet? + Is the [Master Volume] slider [located at the left of the Lower Keyboard) set to the Min (minimum) position? . Turning Off the Power T. Before switching the power off, set the [Master Volumel slider to the Min [minimum] position.

2. Press the [Power On] button to turn off the @

2. Press the [Power On] button to turn on the Upper position

power. » . Power On OFF Lower position pe If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the nus ON POWER switch, then unplug the power cord from the power The main screen will appear in the display. Main Screen

À He 8 a ER EE eh This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval [a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate normally.

oullet. Refer to [Power Supply] (p. 6].

Before You Start Playing Using Headphones Using a Microphone The ATELIER features Phones jacks. These allow you to play The ATELIER is equipped with a Mic jack. without having to worry about bothering others around you, Since this instrument has a Mic jack, you can use a even at night. microphone to enjoy a variety of possibilities such as singing along with your performance, or singing along with SMF ë music files (sold separatelÿ]. 8

Phones ve «Mie AL yes T: Connect your headphones to the [Phones] jack .o @.8, underneath the left side of the keyboard. Th d from the built kers stops. : RE Se one en perstn sos T: Connect your microphone to the [Mic] jack Now, sound is heard only through the headphones. ! underneath the left side of the keyboard. &

2. Adjust the headphones volume with the

[Master Volume] slider and Expression pedal. Some Notes on Using Headphones À CAUTION To prevent damage to the cord, handle the headphones only by the headset or the plug. + Headphones may be damaged if the volume is too high when they are plugged in. Lower the volume on the ATELIER before plugging in headphones. To prevent possible auditory damage, loss of hearing, or damage to the headphones, the headphones should not be used at an excessively high volume. Use the headphones at a moderate volume level. + Accepis connection of Stereo headphones. I plugs of the headphones are plugged into the [Phones] jack, no sound will be heard from the ATELIER's speakers.

2. Use the [Mic Volume] knob to adjust the

volume level for the microphone. You can adjust the depth of the echo applied to sound from MEMp the microphone [p. 221). The microphone must be purchased separately. When NEMD _purchasing a microphone, please consult he vender where you bought the ATELIER. Some Notes on Using a Microphone À CAUTION +_ To avoid disturbing others, be careful of the volume level when playing late at night or very early in the morning. + When connecting a microphone to the ATELIER, be sure to lower the volume. IF the volume control is too high when the microphone is plugged in, noise may be produced by the speakers. + Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by: + Changing the orientation of the microphone. + Relocating the microphone so it is farther from the speakers. + Lowering volume levels.

IE AT-900_e.book 26 K— 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 Before You Start Playing Using the Code Hook If you're using headphones or a mic, you can use the code hook to neatly bundle the cables near your feet. Attaching the Code Hook T: Screw the code hook [with wing nut] about 80% of the way into the screwhole located at the bottom left of the organ.

2. After you've oriented the hook as desired, use

the wing nut to fasten it. About the Hole of the ATELIER's Cabinet AT-900 On the back of the AT-900 there are two holes through which you can pass cables. When connecting an external device to the AT-900, you can pass the connection cables through these holes to the back. T. Remove the cap from the cable pass-thru located on the back of the AT-900.

2. Pass the cables through the holes from which

you removed the cover. IF you remove a cap, keep it in a safe place so that it is not Wing Nut Code hook

À CAUTION + _Avoid inserting fingers into this hole. AT-900C On the back of the AT-900C there a hole through which you can pass cables. When connecting a DVD player or other external device to the AT-900C, this allows you to organize the cables neatly. T. Remove the cover from the cable pass-through located on the rear panel of the AT-900C. Grasp the tab of the cable passthrough cover, and remove the cover.

Before You Start Playing

2. Pass the cable through the hole from which

you removed the cover.

Û ( About the Bench (AT-900)] The bench seat can be opened, and sheet music and other items can be stored inside. Caution When Using the Bench À CAUTION + When opening/closing the seat, be careful not ; to pinch your fingers. Restoring All the Factory Default Settings You can restore all of the settings stored in the ATELIER to what they were when the instrument shipped from the factory. This function is called “Factory Reset.” Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears. BulKel4 HEIS no A 10j8a | |

2. In the System screen, touch <Utility> to open

the Utility screen. D—

f., . You can also use the following method to return to the factory-set condition. Method 1 À Factory Reset ok? T. Touch <Quick Guide> on the Main screen, to display the Quick Guide screen.

2. Press the [One Touch Program] button.

IF you touch <Cancel>, the Factory Reset will not be The confirmation message appears on screen. performed, and you will return to the System screen.

4. When you touch <OK», the Factory Reset

operation will begin, and the settings will À Factory Reset ok? return to the factory-set condition. Never switch off the power while this operation is in progressl IF you touch <Cancel», the Factory Reset will not be performed, and you will return to the System screen. Executing.. @ 3. When you touch <OK», the Factory Reset @ operation will begin, and the settings will return to the factory-set condition.

Loading factory default settings will erase any Registrations currently in the memory of the ATELIER. To save the Method 2 registrations you are currently using, refer to “Saving . T Turn down the volume to the minimum level, then turn off the power. Registration Sets” {p. 113]. If you want to restore settings other than those for User Memory (p. 82) to the factory-set condition, touch <Panel Reset> in the System Utility screen. If you want to restore 2. While holding down the [One Touch Te memory to the factory-set condition, refer to Program] button, press the [Power On] switch to turn the power on. Power On One Touch Program The following screen appears. Factory Preset is Loading...

Before You Start Playing ng the External Mem Songs you record on the ATELIER and registration sets you create can be copied to separately available USB memory for safekeeping. You can also copy songs to a floppy disk using a separately sold floppy disk drive {p. 97, p. 127, p. 188]. È You can also play back SMF music files saved on USB ë memory or a floppy disk {p. 167). Ë Use USB memory and floppy disk drive available from External Memory à Roland. Proper operation cannot be guaranteed if other USB È device is used ä . LUZ Connecting the USB Memory DE 4 FU TA T: Connect the USB memory to the External 90 degrees"? 90 degrees to the left to the right Memory connector. HN Connecting the Floppy Disk Drive Attach the floppy disk drive as shown the figure, using the mounting holes on the ATELIER's bottom panel. | 7 NA For details of the attachment, refer to the owner's manual of MED je floppy disk drive. Carefully insert the USB memory all the way in—until it is firmly in place. If you're using new USB memory or floppy disk, you'll need MEMD to initialize {format} it on the ATELIER. For details, refer to “Formating a USB Memory (Formaï}” (p. 232) Rotating the External Memory Connector Holder The External Memory connector holder rotates 90 degrees left and right. Rotating the External Memory connector holder allows you to avoid damaging the connected external memory 1: Connect the USB cable of the floppy disk drive if something happens to bump against it. to the ATELIER's Ext Drive connector. T: Grasp the External Memory connector holder and turn it 90 degrees to the left or right. Be sure to grasp the External Memory connector holder itself Ext Drive when rotating it. Never rotate the External Memory connector connector holder by holding the connected external memory. USB cable

Take care not to allow your fingers to become pinched when rotating the External Memory connector holder.

Before You Start Playing For information on how to perform the following CD-drive fer to the owner's manual for the drive. ng a [e operations, rel Switching the power on and off You can play back audio CDs and CD-ROMS containing *Inserting and ejecting a CD saved SMF music files. A list of the CD drives that have been tested and found to be ED You can also play songs on VIMA CD-ROMS (VIMA TUNES) Pen compatible is available on the Roland website sold by Roland. htip://www.roland.com/ Precautions Concerning Use of the CD + You cannot play back CD-R/RW disks to which audio tracks have been added or CDs containing both audio tracks and data (CD Extra). The ATELIER is capable of playing back only commercial CDs that conform the official standards-those that carry the “COMPACT DISC DIGITAL AUDIO" logo. The usability and sound quality of audio discs that incorporate copyright protection technology and other non-standard CDs cannot be guaranteed. + For more detailed information on audio discs featuring copyright protection technology and other non-standard CDs, please consult the disc vendor. + You cannot save songs to CDs, and you cannot delete es songs recorded to CDs. Furthermore, you cannot format CDs.

Connecting a CD Drive CD drives that draw their power from the USB connector cannot be used. Ext Drive connector ? EM USB cable A\ K\

1. Switch off the power to the ATELIER and the CD

drive to be connected.

2. Connect the USB cable included with the CD

drive to the Ext Drive connector on the ATELIER.

3. Turn on the power to the ATELIER.

4. Turn on the power to the connected CD drive.

IE AT-900_e.book 31 —> 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 About the Display The ATELIER makes use of a Touch Screen. This lets you carry out a wide variety of actions just by touching the screen lightly. Understanding the Main and Related Screens Main Screen

Number Explanations 1 Bouncing Ball A ball will bounce in time with the rhythm or song. 2 Beat 3 Transpose Displays the keyboard transposition setting. 4 Chord Name Displays the name of the chord that is played in the lower keyboard. Indication button Pressed to choose which name to have indicated; either the Rhythm Name, 5 Song Name, or Registration Name. The name of the rhythm will appear in the screen when you turn on the power. You can change this indication to the song name or the registration name. 6 Rhythm Name/Song Name/Regjistration Name 7 Quick Registration Press this when you want to use the Quick Registration function [p. 37). 8 Music Assistant Press this when you want to use the Music Assistant function (p. 39). Rhythm 9 You can play rhythms from this instrument, or play or store rhythms from USB memory or user memory. Rhythm-related settings can also be made here. The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system [e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual The Touch Screen is operated by touching it lighily with your finger. Pressing hard, or using a hard object can damage the Touch Screen. Be careful not to press too hard, and be sure to use only your fingers to operate the Touch Screen. The positioning of the Touch Screen may become displaced due to changes in the surrounding environment and over time. If this happens, follow the steps in “Repositioning the Touch Screen” (p. 229] to correct the pointer position. Do not place items on the touch screen. You can adjust the brighiness of the screen [p. 224) You can make settings so that the bouncing ball is not shown in the main screen (p. 225), and change the background of the main screen [p. 225).

CIE AT-900_e.book 32K— 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 About the Display Een Number Explanations 10 System Make various settings. Quick Guide Displays the Quick Guide screen. While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, you can press the keyboard, a button, or a foot switch to jump to the related setting screen (p. 43]. 12 Tempo NEMP 13 Measure Tempo, measure number, <Sound/KBD>, <Rec/Play>,

14 Sound/KBD (Sound/Keyboardi <Registration>, and <Main> Select a voice [tone], or make settings for the effect depth, keyboard, etc. u . are always shown in the right Rec/Play side ofthe screen. 15 Play back or record a song. You can also view a notation display while a song plays. Registration 16 Load registrations from user memory into internal memory, or save registrations. Registration-related settings can also be made here. Main 17 Returns you to the main screen if any screen other than the main screen is open. & This icon is displayed when the LINK function is on. & = VAINK function (p. 227] SMF This icon is shown for SMF music files. This icon is displayed when any portion of the recorded song has been altered. This icon is also shown if you've recorded a song but not yet saved it.

About the Display L Foot Switch Drum mm | (all Es Er Meaning Depending on the function, some screens are spread over multiple pages. You can touch <G--0- 0--0- to display the next or previous page of the screen. In the Load screen, Save screen, or File Edit screen, you can select a file by touching < D Touch this when you want to exit [close] the currently displayed screen. This icon is shown for Active Expression voice. — Active Expression Voice (p. 69] This icon is shown for EX voice. —+ Ex Voice [p. 52] This icon is shown for Articulation voice. — Articulation Voice (p. 61) Sub-windows When you touch <Utility> or the like in a screen, a screen like the following Will appear. This type of screen is called a “sub-window." A Registration | MER You can return directly to the main screen by touching the <Main> shown in the right side ofthe screen. When you touch a menu in the sub-window, the sub-window will close, and the selected menu screen will appear. In a sub-window, touch <Exit> to exit the sub:window.

ae) CT] Sub-windows for Setting Values When you are making settings in the System screen, the following type of screen appears. | Factory Return to the factory settings. —) +] Modify the value. her | A Registration arL-] About the [Value] Dial The ATELIER has a [Value] dial. You can use the [Value] dial to change the tempo or edit the settings, or to select a file in screens such as the File Edit screen. Editing the value of a setting (when a sub-window for editing the value is open} Switching files [when the File Edit screen, Save screen, or Load screen for rhythms, songs, or registrations is open) O2:REGIST-02 OS:REGIST-03

IF a sub-window for you to edit the settings is shown, you can use the [Value] dial to switch the settings.

Convenient Functions Listening to the Demo Songs The ATELIER provides demo songs. Here’s how to play the Demo songs, and fully appreciate the sounds, Rhythms, and Automatic Accompaniment that are available with the ATELIER. Composer Song Registraticfi © OT For details on the composer of each demo song and their profiles, refer to "Demo Song Reset Play/Stop Rec List’ (p. 283]. a © SUONOUNA JUSIUSAUOD 1: Press the [Demo] button to make the indicator light. The Demo Screen appears. Art.Violin In this song, the Art Violin tone plays a sweet and colorful melody that drans its inspiration from a scene of cherry blossoms. The dynamic tonal changes, the lustrous vibrato, and portamento and pizzicato all combine ta portray the rich expressiveness that is unique ta the violin

Art.Violin In this song, the Art Violin tone plays a sweet and colorful melody that drans its inspiration from a scene of cherry blossoms. The dynamic tonal changes, the lustrous vibrato, and portamento and pizzicato all combine ta portray the rich expressiveness thatis unique À Registration | You can play/stop the demo songs by pressing the panel [Play/Stop] button.

3. Touch ©- to start playback of the demo song.

When the selected demo song ends, the next demo song will begin playing.

4. Touch ©- once again to stop playback of the demo

5. Press the [Demo] button to exit the demonstration screen.

r . N If the following screen appears IFthe performance song in the unit has not been saved to the “Favorites” (User memory] or USB memory, the following message appears, and it will not be possible to play the Demo songs. The performance data can be saved on the Favorites” (User À Ciear Song OK? memory] or USB memory. If you Wish to save the performance data to the “Favorites” or USB memory, refer to "Saving | « | Performance Songs” (p. 180). 6; If you do not want to delete the performance data, touch ‘6: <Cancel>.

1. If you want to delete the performance data,

Al rights reserved touch <OK>. Unauthorized use of this LU D. material for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws. The data for the Demo song that is being played is not available at the MIDI Out connector.

You can select a voice appropriate for your performance by selecting from keywords representing your situation, location, musical genre, etc. You can call up registrations created by top-level organists, and refer to them for hints on how to select and layer sounds when creating your own registrations. Touch <Quick Registration> on the Main screen. The Quick Registration screen appears. Beautiful Vienna Bach Style Classical Choir Romantic Organ Ave Maria French Organ Adeste Fideles Touch a button that shows a Quick Registration group. BaroacerEan Beautiful Vienna Bach Style Classical Choir Romantic Organ Ave Maria French Organ Adeste Fideles IF another screen is open, touch <Main> to access the main screen.

to select the desired Quick Registration group. The sub-window closes, and the Quick Registration screen returns to the display.

4. Touch <Upper>, <Lower>, or <Pedal>, switching the

respective button’s indicator on or off, to select the keyboard to which the voice is to be assigned. Jezz Quartet |} Noonight Oh, George. |} Sentimental Breathy Sax 4 Setting Keyboard for which you select a voice

Upper Upper keyboard Lower Lower keyboard Pedal Pedalboard

5. |> to switch pages, and touch the desired

The voice will be assigned to the selected keyboard. IF you want to continue changing the voice settings, repeat steps 2-5.

À & IE AT-900_e.book 39 K— 2007#9A7H WA +FM8#439 AN ||@ Convenient Functions Music Assistant Function A collection of the world's best, most wellknown songs were carefully selected, then the optimum panel settings for each of them were determined, and the resulting data was stored inside the instrument. Simply select the keyword that most closely suggests the character of the song you have in mind, and a rhythm performance, a sound for the melody, and other selections will be made for you. Once you've selected a keyword, all you have to do is play the keyboard to start performing. T. Touch <Music Assistant> on the Main screen. If another screen is open, touch Transpose <Main> to access the main screen. SUONOUNA JUSIUSAUOD A Registration |

2. Touch Pal <&- to switch screens, and touch a

keyword appropriate for the character of the song. 1 Cent Lane 3/4 Christmas 3/4 Matilda 3/4 Tennessee 4 Love's Sake The Registration buttons [1]-[4] flash. Panel settings appropriate for the keyword will automatically be called up for the Registration [1]-[4] buttons.

3. On the Lower keyboard, play a chord.

Atthe moment you play the keyboard, the Intro will begin, and then the Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will play. 7 4. Press a Registration button from [1] through [4] to switch the panel settings.

5. Press the [Ending] or [Start/Stop] button to stop the

Program] button, extinguishing its indicator. | 40

You can specify a song name and other search terms and use these for a Music Assistant search. Touch <Music Assistant> on the Main screen. The Music Assistant screen appears. 1 Cent Lane 2Kila Sunrise 3/4 Christmas 3/4 Metilde 3/4 Tennessee 4 Love's Sake Touch <Search>. A sub-window appears. 1 Cent Lane 2Kila Sunrise 3/4 Chris 3/4 Metid 3/4 Tenné 4 Love's Searching by Music Assistant Name

OOOET Cru fs Lu Le [r ] IF another screen is open, touch <Main> to access the main screen.

Decide which character you will use for the search. Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group ('A">"B">"C"..). Touch <ABC/123> to toggle between alphabets and numerals. The selected character appears in the middle of the screen. Touch <Start> (Start Search). The results of the search appear in the display. To cancel the search, touch <Exit> in the Search Results screen. Touch a Music Assistant name to select a Music Assistant. Touch <Exit> to return to the Music Assistant screen. Searching by Conditions

Touch <By Conditions>. You can use four different criteria in searches: “Tempo,” “Rhythm,” “Genre,” and “Scene.” Touch the value for the search term. Touch < —}>< +}> to adjust the settings. Touch <Start> (Start Search). The results of the search appear in the display. To cancel the search, touch <Exit> in the Search Results screen. Touch a Music Assistant name to select a Music Assistant. Touch <Exit> to return to the Music Assistant screen.

Convenient Functions The ATELIER offers a Quick Guide function, which makes it easy for you to access various functions. While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, you can press the keyboard, a button, or a foot switch to jump to the related setting screen. T. Touch <Quick Guide> on the Main screen. The following Quick Guide screen appears. [another screen is open, touch <Main> to access the main screen. SUONOUNA JUSIUSAUOD \« Rec/Play @ : . : sp & Ÿ 2. While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, press a button, Ÿ k For more on keys, buttons, and keyboard, pedal, or foot switch. ontrollers that can be used You will be taken to the screen that contains settings related to the button, With the Quick Guide function, refer to “Settings That Are Stored After the Power ls Turned Off” (p. 281]. keyboard, pedal, or foot switch that you pressed.

3. Make settings in the screen to which you jumped.

4. When you are finished making settings, touch <Exit> to

Fe MNT PE TTET Convenient Functions ÉeE CT] ae) About the Index Menu In the Quick Guide screen, you can touch <index> to access the Index Menu. In the Index Menu screen, you can touch a keyword to jump to the setting screen for that keyword. T. Touch <Quick Guide> on the Main screen. The following Quick Guide screen appears. Transpose Cdi |

The following screen appears. > — Transpose

3. Touch a letter of the alphabet A-W to select the first letter

5. Make settings in the setting screen that appeared.

Convenient Functions Settings for Easy Performance The ATELIER provides a Global Settings buttons. If you press the Global Settings [EZ One Finger] button, you'll be able to produce chords simply by holding down one or two keys of the lower keyboard. IFyou press the Global Settings [EZ Touch] button, you'll be able to play at a fixed volume regardless of variations in your keyboard playing strength.

1. Press the Global Settings [EZ One Finger] button or [EZ

Touch] button. Pressing these buttons will make the following performance settings. Button Explanations — — = IF you press the Global Settings Chord Intelligence function will be on IEZ One Finger] bution to turn it A chord will be detected when you hold down one or two off [the indicator goes out), the keys of the lower keyboard. following functions will return to Pedal To Lower function will be on their factoryset condition. | You can sound the Pedal Bass voice by playing he root note + Chord Intelligence function of a chord on the Lower keyboard in the area that is playing + Pedal To Lower function k the Lower voice. + EZ Touch function & SA | SZ EZ Touch function will be on + Lower Voice Hold function Initial Touch will be tumned off, so that you'll be able to play + Chord Hold function at a fixed volume regardless of variations in your keyboard EZ One Finger touch. Lower Voice Hold function will be on You can have Lower voice continue to sound after you release you fingers from the keys, until the next key is played. IF you press the Global Settings [EZ Touch] button to turn it off Chord Hold function will be on (the indicator goes out), the When you use automatic accompaniment, and you take Initial Touch functions wil return your fingers off the keyboard after fingering a chord in the lower keyboard, the automatic accompaniment will continue playing until you play the next chord. to their factory-set condition. Initial Touch will be turned off Regardless of the Initial Touch settings of the registration, EZ Touch Initial Touch will be turned off. You'll be able to play at a fixed volume regardless of variations in your keyboard touch. These settings make it easier for you to perform.

2. Go ahead and perform!

Selecting and Playing Sounds Selecting Voices You can play the sounds of various instruments on the ATELIER. These sounds are called “Voices.” About the Voices and Parts The ATELIER has two manual keyboards and a pedalboard. From top to bottom these are called the “Upper Keyboard,” “Lower Keyboard,” and “Pedalboard."” PF 7 | | The explanation at left uses an u Keyboard illustration of the AT-900. pper Keyboar: Teste LT 4 o Su s mt — Lower Keyboard É The AT-900C allows a pedal $ keyboard [PK series; sold ë , separately] to be connected Èë Pedalboard and used to play the voice of ä s ( the pedal part. ê & CLA 1 & Four parts, “Organ,” "Symphonic,” "Orchestral,” and “Vintage Organ” are assigned to the Upper and Lower keyboards, respectively, and you can select one voice from each part. Plus, with the addition ofthe “Solo” part voice, you can have up to five voices playing simultaneously [the Solo voice can be played in either the Upper or Lower keyboard). The Pedalboard has three parts: “Pedal Organ,” “Pedal Orchestral,”, and “Vintatge Organ.” You can select one voice for each part, meaning that it is possible to play up to three voices simultaneously. Keyboard Parts Upper Organ Upper Symphonie To play a Solo voice on the Upper Orchestral Upper Keyboard Upper Vintage voice and press the Solo [To Solo Lower] button (p. 158) (This voice is sounded only when the Solo [To Lower] button be extinguished) Lower keyboard, select the Solo Lower Organ Lower Symphonie Lower Orchestral Lower Keyboard | Lower Vintage To play a Pedal Bass voice on the Lower keyboard, select the Sole Pedal Bass voice and press the (This voice is sounded only when the Solo [To Lower] button , P lights up) [Bass Split] button {p. 161). Pedal Organ Pedalboard Pedal Orchestral Pedal Vintage

IE AT-900_e.book 48 K—> 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 Selecting and Playing Sounds Oran Symphonie Orchestra EL 1 E9 E2 ET Fan EC EI pare JEsafaca Rec] ous PE CA ee Le rt À cor na À tes Bundle Pelé lele en … féloem) [ue em) Upper Organ ju Symphonic Orchestral TS = || = DE KI I KJ ne lé ce lé lue Fan LT) Peer ac | Bass RER) © Le mn em) (ee) (ee) ee) eo 0 ee) Lower Orchestra œ fr gel | sg Ja ]ouse Pa 1 © [ee frlen| [2/2 |0rn Pocal Each time you press a voice button, its indicator will switch between being lit and being turned off. Voices that have their button indicator lit can be played. Two voices of the same family are assigned to each voice button. Buttons with voices from two different families have the names of both voices printed on them. The [Alternate] button switches between these two voices. The [Alternate] button Voice that will be selected Lit The voice indicated on the button is selected. Another voice of the same category as the voice shown on the button will be selected. Unlit For buttons to which voices ofthe same category are not assigned, the voice printed below the button will be selected.

No sounds are produced, even when he keys are played, when the Voice button is unlit and all vintage organ voices are off.

À À CIE AT-900_e.book 49 K—: 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 & ||@ Selecting and Playing Sounds Selecting the Upper and Lower Voices Press the “Organ,” “Symphonic,” or “Orchestral” buttons for each Keyboard {Upper/Lower) to select the desired voice. The lower voice can be When the power is turned on, the Upper keyboard will play “Full Organ1” selected in the same way as the and the Lower keyboard will play “Lower Organ1.” upper voice. Example: Selecting “Full Organ 5” for the Upper Organ, “Full Strings” for the Upper Symphonic, and Upper Orchestral “Grand Piano” for the Upper Orchestral.

1. Press the Upper Organ [Full 2] button [indicator lights].

The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds. Full Organ2

Now when you play the Upper keyboard, the “Full Organ 2” will sound.

2. Press the Upper Organ [Alternate] button [the indicator

lights). When you play the Upper keyboard, the “Full Organ 5” will sound. Each time you press the [Alternate] button you will switch between the two voices which are assigned the button.

3. Press the Upper Symphonic [Strings] button [the indicator

lights). Now when you play the Upper keyboard, the two voices “Full Organ 5” and “Full Strings” will sound simultaneously (mixed together).

4. Press the Upper Orchestral [Piano] button [the indicator

lights). When you play the Upper keyboard, “Grand Piano” will be added, producing a mixture of three different voices.

CIE AT-900_e.book 50 K—> 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 Selecting and Playing Sounds Selecting Pedal Bass Voice Immediately after the power is turned on, the Pedal Bass voice will sound single notes using the “Organ Bass1” voice. Normally, playing the Press the buttons ofthe various parts of “Pedal Organ” and “Pedal Orchestral” pedalboard will sound one note at a time. Settings can be to select voices. adjusted to allow multiple notes to be played on the Pedalboard Orchestral {p. 210). IF you press the Pedal [To Ele des) LE Lower] button [indicator lights » p. 163] or [Bass Split] button Pedal {indicator lights -» p. 161), the 1 2 Pedal Bass voice can now be played by the Lower keyboard, not by the Pedalboard. Example: Select “Pipe Org. Bs” for the Pedal Organ part, and select “Str.Bass Pdl” for the Pedal Orchestral part As) æ

1: Press the Pedal Organ [Pipe] button [indicator lights). The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds. The Pedal Organ part has an [Octave Up] button. Notice that Pibe Org. Bs when the [Octave Up] button is on, the selected Pedal Bass voice will sound an octave higher. Now when you play the Pedalboard, “Pipe Org. Bs” (Pipe Organ Bass) will be heard.

2. Press the Pedal Orchestral [String] button lindicator lights).

Now when you play the Pedalboard, the two voices Pipe Organ Bass and Str.Bass Pdl (String Bass Pedal) will sound simultaneously (mixed together).

The Solo section ofthe Upper keyboard is monophonic, that is, the Solo voice Willonly sound for the highest note played on the Upper keyboard. This allows you to play full chords and have the selected Solo voice playing the highest (solo) note.

Alternate To Lower OT © Solo

cui] Example: Selecting “Trumpet” for the Solo part Press the Solo [Trumpet] button (indicator lights). The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds. Trumpet Play the Upper keyboard. The selected voice will sound by the highest note played. When you press the [Alternate] button, the two voices assigned to the button will alternate. You can use the Solo parts harmonic bar to adjust the volume of the Solo part {p. 72) By pressing the Solo [To Lower] button, you can play the Solo voice from the Lower keyboard! For details refer to “Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard [Solo [To Lower] Button)” (p. 158). Itis possible to change how a Solo voice will sound. Normally, the Solo voice will be sounded by the highest note you play on the Upper keyboard, but you can make settings so that the last-played note will sound the Solo voice. For details, refer to “Changing How the Solo Voice Responds” (p.159). You can use the Solo [Others] button to select richly expressive sounds (articulation voices) (p. 61]

ae) ct) Selecting a Voice Using the [Others] Button Notice that there is an [Others] button for each part. By using the [Others] button, you can select all voices. As with the other voice buttons, the [Others] button can be assigned two voices [one voice for “Pedal Organ” and one for “Pedal Orchestral”]. You can use the [Alternate] button to switch between these two voices.

1. Press the [Alternate] button for the Part for which you wish

to specify a voice to select ON |lit) or OFF (dark). The setting of the [Alernate] button: ON {lit} or OFF (dark), determines to which of the two available locations a newly selected voice will be assigned.

2. Press the [Others] button for the Part for which you wish to

specify a voice. The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds. ‘gan Theater Or.5 Theater Or.6

3. Touch a button that shows a sound group.

Theater Or.6 TheaterQuint = 1] L-]

MER Step 1 is unnecessary in the case of Pedal Bass Part. When you press the [Others] button, the Others Voice screen appears in he display screen, but the basic screen will reappear if you wait several seconds without touching the screen. I you want to change the voice D) — for the [Others] button, press the [Others] button once more, then select the voice by quickly touching the screen while the Others Voice screen appears in the display. MER A voice indicated by [EX] is called an “EX voice." These voices are especially recommended. MES Sounds marked by ” support the Active Expression function (p. 69).

Selecting and Playing Sounds You can touch <AEx Voice> in the Voice Select screen to have only the Active Expression voices be displayed. “Active Expression voices” can be assigned to the [Others] buttons of the Upper Orchestral part, Lower Orchestral part, Pedal Orchestral part, and Solo part. For more on the active expression voices, refer to “Performing with an Active . Expression Voice” [p. 69).

4. _inthe sub-window, touch a sound group name to select the L °

desired sound group. The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink. The Others Voice screen appears, showing the sounds of the specified sound group.

L L You can also confirm the voice name to select a voice. by touching <Exit> in the Others Voice (Other Voice select] screen. You can also

6. Once again, press the blinking [Others] button to confirm press he key for the pan

containing a changed voice to the voice. confirm the voice setting. The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit. For more information about the voices that can be assigned to an [Others] button, please refer to “Voice List” (Appendix: separate booklet].

Selecting and Playing Sounds Creating Organ Sounds (Vintage Organ) The Vintage Organ button lets you add three types of vintage organ sounds to the upper, lower, and pedal parts. In addition, you can also use the harmonic bars to modify the selected sound as desired. The ATELIER provides nine harmonic bars for the upper part and lower part respectively, and two harmonic bars for the pedal part. Van can use ihe Solo pas Each harmonic bar is assigned a sound of a different footage {pitch}, and by harmonic bars to adjust the layering these sounds you can create a variety of organ tones. volume of the Solo part voice Vintage Organ Flute Pipe Thoater KA © Harmonic Bar By sliding the harmonic bars forward or backward [in or out), you can adijust the volume of the various footages. The volume can be adjusted over nine steps (0-8). MER IF you've selected “Pipe” or When a harmonic bar is pulled out all the way (8), the volume is loudest. » P When it is pushed in all the way (0), there will be no sound. “Theater” as the vintage organ type, the harmonic bars will turn the various footages on or 8' is the footage that forms the basic pitch of the sound; this is the center off. around which you create the tone. Each harmonic bar is assigned a sine wave {a pure pitch without overtones] of a different pitch, and by combining these pitches you can create a wide range of sounds.

ETC D ï LL DLL | A] Selecting and Playing Sounds 8' volume: 8

D 4 Time  7 \ y \ Jrime 4 volume: 5 T N What's the feet? “Feet” is a term that began as a measurement of the length of the pipes in a pipe organ. The pipes that produce the basic pitch [fundamental) for each note are considered to be “8 feet” in length. Therefore, a pipe producing a pitch one octave below that of the reference of 8’ (eight feet} would be 16'; for one octave above the reference, the pipe would be 4’, and to take the pitch up yet another octave it would be shortened to 2. The pitches of the harmonic bars are related as follows. When the middle C (C4) note is pressed, each harmonic bar will sound the following notes. spunos Bute pue Buroaies |.

\ 7 | |) | 7 en] [em] ||) es] | em] ||] 16" 51/3" 8' 4' 22/3" 2" 13/5 11/3 1' one octave … 5th root 8h 12h 15h 17h 19h 22nd | -rté On tonewheel organs, the high-pitched footage for a portion of the high range, and the low-pitched footage for a portion of the low range are “folded-back” in units of one octave. Folding back the high-frequency portion prevents the high-frequency sounds from being unpleasantly shrill, and folding back the low-frequency portion prevents the sound from becoming “muddy.” On the ATELIER faithfully simulates this characteristic.

CIE AT-900_e.book 56K—> 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 Selecting and Playing Sounds Playing a Vintage Organ Voice Selecting the Type of Vintage Organ 1: Press one of the Vintage Organ buttons so its indicator is lit. Each time you press the button, the indicator will alternate between ON {lit} and OFF. Vintage Organ Flute Pipe Theater OCT There are three types of vintage organ. NOTE Button Ben ten Pitch bend, glide, and sustain effects are not applied to the [Flute] button Full Organ Vintage Organ voice. [Pipe] button Pipe Organ [Theater] button Theater Organ

2. Slide the harmonic bars that you want to hear.

You can layer the sound of multiple harmonic bars. Various pitches can be combined for the Lower keyboard in the same way as for the Upper keyboard. Vintage Organ 9 a É Ê Function of the Harmonic Bars Percussion is often used with ype Flute. lt can also be used with Flute Slide the harmonic bars to adjust the volume of each Pipe or Theater, but if you have ui : footage over a range of nine steps (0-8). selected percussion for Flute, x : itching to Pi Theater will Pipe Use the harmonic bars to turn each footage on/off. eng re peer recent . : . . . cause percussion to be Pulling a harmonic bar out will turn it on, and pushing it Iled automaticall cancelled automatical Theater in will turn it off. Y The harmonic bar for the Solo part will adjust the volume of the voice selected for the Solo part. When you move the Solo parts harmonic bar, the Solo part's level indicator will also change.

Selecting and Playing Sounds Adding Sparkle to the Sound (Percussion) This adds an attack sound to the beginning of the note, making the sound crisper.

3. Press the Percussion [4’] button or [2 2/3/1 button [indicator

lit). Play the Upper keyboard and notice that an attack has been added. Percussion Button Explanation Percussion [4] button Percussion one octave above Percussion [2 2/3] button Percussion one octave and a fifih above Adjusting the Rate at which the Percussion Decays

You can shorten the decay time of the percussion sound.

4. Press the Percussion [Fast Decay] button to switch the

indicator between lit/unlit. Percussion [Fast Decay] Button Explanation Lit The percussion sound will disappear quickly. The percussion will have a sharper atack. Unlit The percussion sound will disappear slowly. The percussion will have a more gentle attack. Percussion [4°] and [2 2/3] buttons cannot be used simultaneously. The Percussion [4’] button and Percussion [2 2/3'] button are valid only for vintage organ voices of the upper part.

Selecting and Playing Sounds Using the Harmonic Bar Settings of the Panel IF you've edited the harmonic bar settings in the screen, or if you've switched registrations so that the Vintage Organ settings have changed, you can switch the Vintage Organ settings to the positions [settings] of the harmonic bars on the panel (p. 54).

1. Press the H-Bar [Manual] button.

When you press the Vintage Organ button, a vintage organ screen like the following will appear. There are two types of vintage organ screens. Vintage Organ Screen WE When the Vintage Organ Type is “Flute” The Vintage Organ screen will be displayed for several seconds, then it will close automatically. IF you touch <Hold>, the screen continues to be displayed until you touch <Exit>. When you touch the Vintage Organ screen and then change the settings, > the screen is held in that À & condition. & The screen will show the harmonic bars. : : LL . By touching the screen and By touching the harmonic bars and sliding them, you can adjust the volume of sliding your fingertip to the left each footage. The volume can be adjusted over nine steps (0-8). or right [horizontally), you can When a harmonic bar is pulled out all the way (8), the volume is loudest. adjust the volume of all When it is pushed in all the way (0), there will be no sound. harmonic bars. Icon Explanation Vib (Vibrato) | Adds a vibrato effect to the sound. Cho (Chorus) | Adds a chorus effect to the sound. I is not possible to apply both Touching the icon cycles you through the available choices, vibrato and chorus U/L/P which are: Upper Vintage screen, Lower Vintage screen, and simultaneously. Pedal Vintage screen. The Vintage Organ screen will automatically close after it has Hold been displayed for several seconds. If you touch <Hold>, the dE screen will remain displayed until you touch <Hold> once again. vou can touch < [OU + to switch between the Upper Vintage Organ screen, Lower Vintage Organ screen, and Pedal Vintage Organ screen.

Selecting and Playing Sounds When the Vintage Organ Type is “Pipe” or “Theater” Upper Vi HTC The buttons displayed in the screen are called "tablets."” You can press each tablet to turn it on/off. You can turn tablets on/off by moving the harmonic bars in the panel. D —

Adjusting the volume of the Flute vintage organ If you've selected “Flute” as the vintage organ type, you can adjust the overall volume of the Flute sound to regulate the volume balance relative to the other sounds. IF you've selected “Pipe” or “Theater,” the volume of the upper/lower/pedal organ part will change at he same T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. K J:1 rs A m Fu Organt Mu Strings M _— Solo |7 Sound/KBD| Grand Piano _ rues ] Lover Organt Morch tr Ens Roc/Play

The Effect screen appears. NORMAL. BRIGHT E

VintageFlute Volume to adjust the setting.

IE AT-900_e.book 61 K— 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 Selecting and Playing Sounds Realistically Expressing an Acoustic Instrument Performance (Articulation Voice] What is an Articulation Voice? In order to bring out the distinctive qualities of an acoustic instrument and perform in a musically significant way, it is essential to employ the instrument's rich variety of tonal changes and diverse performance techniques {articulations}. Voices that are able to realistically express these acoustic instrument sounds and techniques are called “articulation voices” on the ATELIER. By using articulation voices, you can express the sounds and techniques of such instruments in real time. When playing an articulation voice, playing the keyboard legato or staccato will cause the sound to change according to your playing technique. By also using aftertouch, foot switch, etc., while you play, you can apply a variety of effects to the sound, making your performance even richer and more realistic. Terms Used with Articulation Voices Legato playing This refers to the play of successive notes without causing a break between them to be perceived. On a keyboard instrument, you would play the next note slightly before releasing the currently held key, causing the notes to briefly overlap. Staccato playing This is the opposite of legato playing, and means that you clearly separate each note you play. In other words, you would release the currently held key before playing the next note. Dynamics This refers to the variations between loud and soft when playing an instrument, and includes not only changes in volume but also performance techniques that affect the tonal character. For articulation voices, you can use aftertouch, initial touch, and expression pedal to vary the dynamics. Portamento This is a technique in which the pitch is changed smoothly from one note to the next. This smooth change in pitch is particularly effective when playing bowed string sounds such as violin or cello, or trombone. What is aftertouch? This allows you to apply various effects to the sound by pressing down on the key after you've played a note. MED What is initial touch? This refers to the way in which the loudness or character of the sound is affected by the force with which you strike the keys. Slight variations in your playing touch can add expressive character to the sound.

Selecting and Playing Sounds ss: JE 0 rm ed

ae) Selecting a Articulation Voice Atticulation voices can be selected only using the Solo part's [Others] button. Atticulation voices cannot be selected using the [Others] T. Press the Solo [Others] button. ne The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds. Solo part. When you press the [Others] button, the Others Voice screen appears in he display screen, Cup Mute Tp. | Fiugel Horn ÿ ; but the basic screen will reappear if you wait several seconds without touching the screen. Mute Trumpet TromboneSolo Et MuteTrumpet2 _rromene | If you want to change the voice | [ | Main for the [Others] button, press the [Others] button once more, then select the voice by quickly touching the screen while the

2. Touch a button that shows a sound group. eee screen appears in

Selecting and Playing Sounds

3. _Inthe sub-window, touch <Art. Voice> (Articulation Voice).

The indicator of the Solo [Others] button will blink. The Others Voice (Others Voice Select) screen appears, and only the Articulation Voices from the entire collection are displayed. Art.Cello L] Art.Trombone #8 Art.TenorSax_ #8 = 1e

4. Touch a voice name to select a voice.

confirm the voice. The indicator for the [Others] button of the Solo part will change from blinking to lit, and the articulation voice will be selected. MERp articulation voices. spunos Guiela pue uroees | | D — You can also confirm the voice by touching <Exit> in the Others Voice (Other Voice select] screen.

CIE AT-900_e.book 64K—: 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 Selecting and Playing Sounds Performing with an Articulation Voice Atticulation voices let you vary the character of the sound by changing your playing technique. IF you play legato, the sound will change smoothly between notes. If you play staccato, the sound will have a crisp attack. Using Aftertouch or the Expression Pedal Aftertouch will affect the dynamics and vibrato of an articulation voice. As you apply stronger pressure to the keyboard, the dynamics will increase and the vibrato will become deeper. As you relax your pressure on the keyboard, the dynamics will decrease and the vibrato will become shallower. The expression pedal will vary the dynamics and vibrato in the same way as aftertouch, but for voices other than the Solo part, the volume will change in the same way as a conventional expression pedal. You should use aftertouch if you want to apply expressive effects only to the articulation voice.

After Touch -> p. 61 Dynamics > p. 61 What is vibrato? This is an effect that modulates the pitch of the notes you play on the keyboard.

EDAEUTAEUENATITT Selecting and Playing Sounds ONE] Making the Ideal Settings for Playing an Articulation Voice You can perform even more effectively with an articulation voice by making the appropriate solo mode and foot switch settings. You can automatically set these controller settings so that they are ideal for performing with an articulation voice.

The tollowing message appears. 8 &) The following settings will be changed ‘6: +o the optimal settings for playing an articulation voice. OK? After Touch: ON Solo Mode: POLYPHONIC L Foot Switch: ART.CONTROL 1 To cancel the change, touch <Cancel>.

2. Touch <OK> to change the setting.

The settings will be changed as follows. Item Setting Page After Touch ON p. 209 Solo Mode POLYPHONIC p. 159 L Foot Switch ART. CONTROLI p. 134

CIE AT-900_e.book 66 K— 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 Selecting and Playing Sounds Tips for Performing with an Articulation Voice Distinctive Features of the Violin (Art.Violin) The distinctive character of the violin lies in its rich vibrato, the portamento playing technique, which allows the pitch to be changed smoothly, and the pizzicato technique, in which the string is plucked with a finger. The Art.Violin sound lets you express these distinctive features of the violin. Performance tips Changes in the tonal character and the depth of vibrato are very important elements of violin performance. The most important thing is to skillfully use aftertouch to control the dynamics. You can also emphasize the attack ofthe notes by playing a key strongly. Portamento is another distinctive element. In order to perform with portamento, set the foot switch setting to ART.CONTROL, and play legato on the keyboard while pressing the foot switch. Playing the new note strongly will produce a rapid portamento, while playing the new note gently will produce a slow portamento. Quickly playing an upward or downward chromatic step will produce a violin-like effect in As) 7" \ 2 & which the sound is completely connected. By using this at appropriate points in your phrases, you can perform in a highly effective way. Normally, the Art.Violin sound will play monophonically, but if you play “Muliple stopping” is a multiple keys simultaneously or play while holding down the damper pedal, technique by which more fhan you'll be able to play the multiple-stop notes that are distinctive of the violin one note can be played simultaneously on a violin or {up to four-note chords). other stringed instrument. Foot switch effect Item Explanation By playing the keyboard legato while holding down the foot ART. CONTROLI | switch, you can produce portamento that changes the pitch smoothly. By playing the keyboard while holding down the foot switch, ART. CONTROL2 | you can produce a pizzicato sound of the string being plucked with the finger instead of being played with a bow. Recommended pitch range G3-G7 [when Octave Shift is O. Middle C is CA.) Distinctive Features of the Cello (Art.Cello) Important aspects of the cello's sound are its deep body resonances and the rich tonal changes. The Art.Cello sound lets you fully express these distinctive nuances of the cello.

IE AT-900_e.book 67 K—> 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 Selecting and Playing Sounds Performance tips The basic performance techniques are the same as for Art.Violin. You can use aftertouch and expression pedal to control the dynamics and produce a richly expressive mid- and low-range sound. Striking the keys more strongly will emphasize the attack by adding a brief sound of the bow scraping on the strings. The pizzicato that is heard when you set the foot switch setting to ART.CONTROLZ and play a note lets you instantly change from arco [bowed) sounds to pizzicato {plucked). You can make effective use of this by switching between the two sounds at the right moment within a phrase. The Art.Cello instrument has a low pitch range. IF you're playing it on the upper manual, you’ll probably want to set Octave Shift to -1 to increase the area in which the sound can be played effectively. Foot switch effect Item Setting By playing the keyboard legato while holding down the foot ART. CONTROLI | switch, you can produce portamento that changes the pitch smoothly. By playing the keyboard while holding down the foot switch, ART. CONTROL2 | you can produce a pizzicato sound of the string being plucked with the finger instead of being played with a bow. Recommended pitch range C2-F5 (when Octave Shift is O. Middle C is C4.) Distinctive Features of the Trombone (Art.Trombone) The most distinctive feature of the trombone is the portamento effect obtained by using the slide. The Art.Trombone sound supports this performance technique. Performance tips The dynamics control produced by aftertouch and expression pedal lets you smoothly and naturally transition from a sofily blown gentle sound to a strongly blow intense sound. Striking the keys more strongly will produce a briefly “overblown” sound. The portamento technique, which smoothly changes the pitch, is an important part of the trombone's distinctive character, but can sound unnatural if overused. The key is to use it only at a limited number of points in the song where it will be most effective. The Art.Trombone instrument has a low pitch range. If you're playing it on the upper manual, you'll probably want to set Octave Shift to -1.

À À CIE AT-900_e.book 68 —: 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 S ||@ Selecting and Playing Sounds Foot switch effect Item Explanation IF you hold down the foot switch and play the keyboard legato, you will obtain a portamento effect in which the pitch will change smoothly. ART. CONTROLI ART. CONTROL2 Recommended pitch range E2-A5 {when Octave Shift is O. Middle C is C4.} Distinctive Features of the Tenor Sax (Art.TenorSax) From soft and gentle tones to crisp, strong notes, the Art.TenorSax sound lets you express the broad range of the tenor sax. Performance tips An important aspect of sax performance is to make skillful distinctions between legato and staccato. Be aware of the difference between playing a smooth phrase with a single breath, and playing a phrase with sharply distinguished notes. The first note of a phrase you play will include the slight upward swoop in pitch that is distinctive of wind instruments. When you play crisp staccato notes or rapid passages, the corresponding nuances distinctive of a sax will also be expressed in an appropriate manner. As) 7" \ 2 & By letting up a bit on the aftertouch at the end of a phrase, you can express the sensation of the sound's natural decay as you stop blowing into the instrument. The same effect can be produced by returning the expression What is the growl effect? pedal slightly toward yourself instead of using aftertouch. This is an effect produced by vocalizing into the mouthpiece of a sax while blowing. It The growl effect produced by the foot switch ART.CONTROL2 is particularly : . ‘ c produces the powerful and useful when you want to emphasize a phrase in styles such as jazz. It's distinctively distorted sound effective when used on one or two notes at a musical climax. unique to a sax. Foot switch effect Item Setting By playing the keyboard legato while you hold down the foot ART. CONTROLT | switch, you can apply portamento to smoothly vary the pitch between notes. By playing the keyboard while you hold down the foot ART. CONTROL2 | switch, you can apply a growl effect, as ifthe performer was “’moaning” while blowing into the instrument. Recommended pitch range G#2-D#5 [when Octave Shift is O. Middle C is C4.)

Selecting and Playing Sounds

For “Active Expression Voices,” operating the expression pedal will control not only the volume but also the tone, or may add additional sounds. Touch the [Others] button of the Part to which you want to assign an Active Expression voice. The Others Voice screens appears. “Active Expression voices” can be assigned to the [Others] buttons of the Upper Orchestral part, Lower Orchestral part, Pedal Orchestral, and Solo part. Touch a button that shows a sound group. A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group. In the sub-window, touch <AEx Voice> (Active Expression Voice). The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink. The Others Voice (Others Voice Select] screen appears, and only the Active Expression Voices from the entire collection are displayed. AEX Voi AEx Strings Îl __ D Touch <©-<0- to change screens, and touch a voice name. Once again, press the [Others] button for the part whose sound you wish to set to confirm the voice. The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit. An active expression voice will be selected.

For details on the active expression voices that are available, refer to “Voice list” (Appendix: separate booklet]. Although you can select an Active Expression voice with the [Others] button for parts other than Lower Orchestral, Upper Orchestra, Pedal Orchestral, and Solo, no Active Expression effect is applied. The Active Expression] icon does not appear when an Active Expression voice is selected for a part for which the Active Expression effect is not being used. MER Sounds marked by nil

support the Active Expression function. You can also confirm the voice by touching <Exit> in the Others Voice (Other Voice select] screen. You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting.

Selecting and Playing Sounds

ae) ct) Performing with a Human Voice In addition to sounds such as organ and piano, you can also play “human voice,” which produces a vocallike sound. Press the [Alternate] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice to select ON |lit) or OFF (dark). The setting of the [Alernate] button: ON {lit} or OFF (dark), determines to which of the two available locations a newly selected voice will be assigned. Press the [Others] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice. The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds. P9/12 Theater Or.3 Theater Or.7 Theater O4 En Theater Or.5 Theater Or.6 Touch a button that shows a sound group. LyricTheater Æa TheaterQuint

For details on the Human Voice that are available, refer to “Voice List” [Appendix: separate booklet]. NEMP Step 1 is unnecessary in the case of Pedal Bass Part. When you press the [Others] button, the Others Voice screen appears in he display screen, but the Main screen will reappear if you wait several seconds without touching the screen. IF you want to change the voice for the [Others] button, press the [Others] button once more, then select the voice by quickly touching the screen while the Others Voice screen appears in the display.

ie] Selecting and Playing Sounds

In the sub-window, touch <Human Voice>. The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink. The Others Voice screen appears, showing the sounds of the Human Voice group. The Others Voice screen will appear, and the sounds of the Human Voice group will appear. Jazz Doot

| >< C- to switch the screen, and touch a voice name to select the desired voice. Touch < Human Voice Jazz Scat 2 Jazz Scat 3 Once again, press the [Others] button for the part whose sound you wish to set to confirm the voice. The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit. For some human voices, such as “Jazz Scat,” the sound will change depending on the strength at which you play the keyboard. If the Utility menu setting “Initial Touch” [p. 210) is “OFF,” the sound will not change in response to the dynamics of your keyboard playing. You can also confirm the voice by touching <Exit> in the Others Voice (Other Voice select] screen. You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting. _+1@ spunos Buifeid pue Buyoeles

= =s|\: Upper The following buttons are used to adjust the volume of a multiple number of SP Parts. Button Part Automatic Accompaniment (except Bass] Accomp/SMF [A] [] button Playback of performance songs from something other than the ATELIER performance songs [for example: SMF music files] Rhythm [A] [W] button {When the [Manual Perc] Manual percussion button is ON) Rhythm [A] [W] button Rhythm performance {When the [Manual Perc] button is OFF) Drums/SFX Pedal Organ voice Pedal Organ [A] [v] button Bass note of automatic accompaniment You can use the Solo parts harmonic bar to adjust the volume of the Solo part.

run T. The volume levels of each part are adjusted using the corresponding [A] and [#] buttons. Pressing the upper button ([A] button) will increase the volume. Selecting and Playing Sounds Pressing the lower button {[W] button) will decrease the volume. The volume can be set to any value from O to 12. When the volume value shown in the display is O, that part will produce no sound. You can also press the [A] button or [W] button of the part whose volume you wish to adjust, so that the “Part Balance Monitor screen” is displayed for several seconds, allowing you to check the volume balance. The Part Balance Monitor screen is displayed for several Pert Balance Monitor seconds and then closes automatically.

IF you touch <Hold>, the screen g continues to be displayed until & you touch <Exit>. à

a PS \ 2 @ Alternate To Lower

Fe MNT PE TTET Selecting and Playing Sounds Se CT] ae) Transpose the Pitch in Octave Units (Octave Shifi) The pitch ofthe sound played by the keyboard can be adjusted in one-octave steps. This function is called “Octave Shift.” You can apply an Octave shift to all Parts. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. Transpose

Menu Part whose pitch will change Upper To change the pitch of the Upper and Solo part Lower To change the pitch of the Lower part Pedal To change the pitch of the Pedal part

4. Touch the part display of the part whose Octave Shift

settings you wish to change. You can open the Pedalboard screen, Lower Keyboard Upper Keyboarc o À screen, or Upper Keyboard screen with touching <Pedal>, <lower>, and <Upper>. je . When the power is turned on,

5. Touch < —}> < +}> to adijust the settings. be Octave Shi seing Renh £

The value can be set to a range of +/- 3 octaves. par of the Pedal will be set to - à 1 (1 octave down). 2 If you turn on the [Octave Up] 5 button, the Octave Shift will be È automatically set to “0” % regardless of the previous Ë setting. When you turn off the a [Octave Up] button, the Octave )— Shift will always return to “1” regardless of the previous seing.

You will return to the Upper Keyboard/Lower Keyboard/Pedalboard screen. Please note that when you apply the Octave Shift function to certain voices, their pitch could be stretched beyond their recommended nole ranges, and they may not sound as expected. Care should be taken when using Octave Shift.

| & AT-900_e.book 76 K—> 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 Selecting and Playing Sounds Playing Drum Sounds or Sound Effects from the Entire Lower Keyboard (Drums/SFX) You can use the Lower keyboard to play various drum sounds (drum set]. In this case, the Lower voices will no longer sound.

Drums/|| M}nual SFX }|| J'erc Lower 1: Press the [Drums/SFX] button, getting its indicator to light up. The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will alternate between on {lit} and off {dark} each time it is pressed. The Drums/SFX (drums/sound effects) screen will be displayed for several seconds. Drum: P1/3

2. Play the Lower keyboard and listen to the various drum

sounds on each key. Refer to “Drum Set List” for details on which drum sound or Sound Effect will be played by each note. It is not possible to select and play both [Drums/SFX] and [Manual Perc] buttons simultaneously. For some drum sets, there will be keys that do not sound.

Selecting and Playing Sounds Changing Drums/SFX Sets

As the drum set, you can choose the types of drum set and sound effect. When you change the drum set, the sound produced by each note will change. Immediately after the power is turned on, the POP drum set will sound. Press the [Drums/SFX] button, getting its indicator to light up. The Drums/SFX screen will be displayed for several seconds. Dru

While the Drums/SFX screen is displayed, touch a Drum/ SFX set name in the screen. The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will begin to blink. You can select from 18 different Drum Sets and one set of Sound Effects as follows: Drums/SFX Set POP, R&B, ROCK, JAZZ BRUSH, HIP HOP, VOX DRUM, STANDARD, STANDARD2, ROOM, ROOM2, POWER, ELECTRONIC, TR-808, DANCE, JAZZ,

BRUSH, BRUSH2, ORCHESTRA, SOUND EFFECTS

Press the [Drums/SFX] button once again. The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will change from blinking to lit, and your choice of drum set will be finalized. For the types of drum set and the sound effects played by each key, refer to “Drum/SFX Set List.” After the Drums/SFX (drums/ sound effects) screen is displayed, it will close automatically after several seconds unless you touch the screen to select a drums/sound effects set. IF you wish to switch drums/sound effect sets, quickly select the desired drums/sound effect set while the Drums/SFX {drums/sound effecis) screen is displayed. You can also confirm the Drums/SFX set by touching <Exit> in the Drums/SFX screen. You can also play the lower manual to confirm the drum set.

Selecting and Playing Sounds

Playing a Lower Voice with Percussion Instrument Sounds and a Voice Phrase (Manual Percussion)

K@) You can play various drum sounds and Sound Effects using the bottom 15 keys of the Lower keyboard. This is convenient when you wish to play the Lower voice together with drum sounds or Sound Effects. the keys for Drum Drun(s/|| Manual SF] Perc sounds or Sound Effects KL LL 15 keys ! Lower Keyboard Press the [Manual Perc] button (indicator lights). The button will pressed. alternate between ON Ilit} and OFF (dark) each time it is The Manual Percussion screen will be displayed for several seconds.

PERC SET 2 LATIN SET

PERC SET 3 ASIAN SET

ORCHESTRA SET VOICE PHRASE

When you play the bottom 15 keys of the Lower keyboard the chosen drum sound is played on each key. It is not possible to select and play both [Drums/SFX] and [Manual Perc] buttons simultaneously. (p. 76].

Selecting and Playing Sounds Changing the Manual Percussion Sets

You can choose the type of Manual Percussion Set. When you change the Manual Percussion Set, the sound played by each of the 15 lowest notes of the Lower keyboard will change. Immediately after the power is turned on, the PERC SETI drum set will sound. Press the [Manual Perc] button (indicator lights). The Manual Percussion screen will be displayed for several seconds. Manuel n P1/2 (ROSE | rc: sTRA se T2

PERC SET 2 LATIN SET

PERC SET 3 ASIAN SET

ORCHESTRA SET VOICE PHRASE

Main While the Manual Percussion screen is displayed, touch a manual percussion set name in the screen. The [Manual Perc] button indicator will begin to flash. You can select from 14 different Manual Percussion Sets; Manual Percussion Set PERC SET 1, PERC SET 2, PERC SET 3, ORCHESTRA SET, ORCHESTRA SET2, LATIN SET, ASIAN SET, VOICE PHRASE, VOICE PHRASE 2, VOICE PHRASE 3, SFX SET, SFX SET 2, JAPANESE SET, JAPANESE SET 2 Press the [Manual Perc] button once again. The [Manual Perc] button indicator will change from blinking to lit, and your choice of drum set will be finalized. Refer to “Manual Percussion List’ [Appendix: separate booklet} for details on which percussion sound will be played by each note. The Manual Percussion screen will automatically close afier several seconds if you do not touch the screen to select a manual percussion set. If you wish to change the manual percussion set, you must select a manual percussion set quickly while the manual percussion screen is displayed. You can also confirm the Manual Percussion set by touching <Exit> in the Manual Percussion screen. You can also play the lower manual to confirm the manual percussion set.

Selecting and Playing Sounds DLL Sustaining Notes in the Lower Part (Lower Hold) You can have Lower voice continue to sound after you release you fingers from the keys, until the next key is played.

L'*) Lower Voice T. Press the Lower Voice [Hold] button (confirm that the indicator is lit]. The Lower voice will continue sounding. While the Lower Voice [Hold] button is lit, pressing a key will cause the note to continue sounding.

2. When you press the Lower Voice [Hold] button to make the

indicator go dark, the notes which had continued to sound & will stop.

The ATELIER lets you enjoy playing along with a rhythmic accompaniment. For details, refer to the Voice List (Appendix: separate booklet). electing a Rhythm

The ATELIER provides various Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniments [Music Styles). The ten buttons below are called “rhythm buttons,” and let you select rhythms that are categorized by musical style. un Oldies/ ee Core Wal! ru Press a Rhythm button to select a Rhythm group. The indicator will light. A Rhythm screen like the following appears. — | Breezy Suing | Swing name to select the desired rhythm. The indicator of Rhythm button will blink. Press the Rhythm button once again [indicator lights constantly). The Rhythm button's indicator will change from blinking to light. You can also open the Rhythm screen by touching <Rhyihm>

eoueuuoyed WuyAy4 Buisn in the Main screen. You can also confirm the rhythm by touching <Exit> in the Rhythm screen. nil

an. | & AT-900_e.book 82 K—> 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 Using Rhythm Performance Using Rhythms Stored in User Memory The ATELIER features a User memory. What is the User Memory? This is the internal memory area that lets you store user rhythms you've created. You can also copy rhythms saved on USB memory to the User memory (p. 97). The ATELIER is shipped from the factory with rhythms already stored in User memory. These rhythms can be overwritten by calling up rhythms from USB memory into the ATELIER, or by saving user rhythms you've created using the Rhythm Customize function (p. 198]. The content of User memory is retained even while the ATELIER's power is turned off. You can call up rhythms in User memory by pressing the [User] button. Calling Up Rhythms Stored in User Memory

Press the [User] button. The Rhythm screen appears. Æ Rhythn (3 6/8 Balad Trad Tango MerchingBand Touch < —}> < +}> on the Rhythm screen to select “User.” The rhythms stored in user memory will be shown. | <&- to switch screens, and touch a rhythm name to select the desired rhythm. The indicator of [User] button will blink. After selecting a rhythm, press the flashing [User] button once more. The [User] button stops flashing and remains lit, indicating that the rhythm has been selected.

IFyou wish to copy a Rhythm saved on USB memory to User memory, refer to ‘Copying Rhythms” [p. 97). MER IF you want to restore the original rhythms that User memory contained at the time the instrument was shipped from the factory, refer to “Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings” {p. 230). IFUSB memory is connected, you can touch < —}> « +}> to select “Ext Memory” so that rhythms in the USB memory will be shown. You can also confirm the rhythm by touching <Exit> in the Rhythm screen.

Using Rhythm Performance Rhythm Search You can search for Rhythm that match the tempo of the song, musical genre, or other criteria you set. You can also search Rhythm using the first character of the Rhythm names. Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen. Transpose

A sub-window appears. JimmysGroo! If another screen is open, touch <Main> to access the main screen. MED You can also open the Rhythm screen by pressing Rhythm buttons.

You can also search only for rhythms other than the internal rhyihms accessed with the [User] button. The MÆ)] icon does not appear in the display while [User] button rhythms are displayed.

Touch <By Names. Decide which character you will use for the search. The selected character appears in the middle of the screen. Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group ('A">"B">"C"..). Touch <ABC/123> to toggle between alphabets and numerals. Touch <Start> (Start Search). The search results appear in the display. To cancel the search, touch <Exit> in the Search Results screen. Touch a Rhythm name to select a Rhythm. Touch <Exit> to return to the Rhythm screen. Searching by Conditions

Touch <By Conditions>. You can use four different criteria in searches: “Tempo,” “Beat,” “Groove,” and “Genre.” Touch the value for the search term. Touch < —}> < +/}> to adjust the settings. Touch <Start> (Start Search). The search results appear in the display. To cancel the search, touch <Exit> in the Search Results screen. Touch a Rhythm name to select a Rhythm. Touch <Exit> to return to the Rhythm screen.

Using Rhythm Performance Playing Rhythm There are two ways to start the rhythm. You can press the [Start/Stop] button to start the rhythm, or you can use Synchro Start to have the rhythm start when you play the lower keyboard or the pedal keyboard. You can also make the rhythm start with an intro, or stop with an ending.

Count Sync Down Start 1 Start/ Into || Ending Stop Starting at the Press of a Button Starting with an Added Intro

Press the [Intro] button. Press the [Start/Stop] button. The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts. While the Intro is playing, the [Intro] button indicator will light, until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark. Starting Without an Intro Press the [Start/Stop] button. The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played. Making the Intro Short and Simple

Press the Variation [1] button. Press the [Intro] button. Press the [Start/Stop] button. A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts. The functions of the [Intro] button, [Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 134). You can change the operation of the Fill In [Auto] button, [Break] button, [Intro] button, and [Ending] button (p. 215) For more on the Variation buttons, refer to “Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment” (p. 89).

soueuoued WUAUE Buisn nil

IE AT-900_e.book 86 —> 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 ll I Using Rhythm Performance LL Starting the Rhythm Automatically When You Play the Lower Keyboard or Pedalboard [Sync Start) Starting with an Added Intro D function is ON {the Arranger [On/Of] button indicator is lif}, it is not be able

1. Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up. en D ner

2. Press the [Intro] button.

The [Intro] button's indicator will light.

3. Play either the Lower keyboard or the Pedalboard.

The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts. While the Intro is playing, the [Intro] button indicator will light, until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark. Starting Without an Intro

1: Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.

2. Play either the Lower keyboard or the pedalboard.

The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played. Making the Intro Short and Simple 1: Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.

2. Press the Variation [1] button.

For more on the Variation

3. Press the [Intro] button. button, refer to "Adding Variety

[intro] button indicator will blink. to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment” (p. 89)

4. Play either the Lower keyboard or the Pedalboard.

A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

Using Rhythm Performance Stopping the Rhythm Stopping with an Ending Press the [Ending] button. An Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops. While the Ending is playing, the [Ending] button indicator will light, until the Ending finishes the button indicator will be turned off. Stopping without an Ending Press the [Start/Stop] button. The Rhythm stops without an Ending being played. Making the Ending Short and Simple

Press the Variation [1] button. Press the [Ending] button. A short Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops. The functions of the [Intro] button, [Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 134). You can change the tempo of the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment (p. 88). rStandard:

Tempo Press the Tempo [ «] and [»- ] buttons to change the tempo (speed) of the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment. Tempo [ @{ ] button The tempo becomes slower The tempo becomes faster Tempo [D ] button By pressing the Tempo [ @] and[ - ] buttons simultaneously, the tempo is returned to the standard {preset) tempo for the selected Rhythm. The value of the tempo currently set (20-500 beats per minute) can be checked in the screen. IF you switch rhythms when “Auto Std Tempo” (p. 215] is on, the tempo changes to match the rhythm. If you switch rhythms when “Auto Sid Tempo” is off, the tempo remains unchanged even when you switch the rhythm. You can confirm the tempo and beat with the “bouncing ball” in the Main screen (p. 31). You can also use the Value dial to change the tempo.

soueuoued WUAUE Buisn nil

ele enl al Using Rhythm Performance Bees) | If an intro is played before your performance, you can have a countdown played to the end of the intro, allowing you to understand easily where you are to start playing. Count Sync Down Start Start/ Intro }|| Ending LS) 1: Press the [Count Down] button, getting the indicator to light.

2. Press the [Intro] button.

3. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

The intro plays, and a countdown plays to the end of the intro. You can change the countdown When the [Sync Start] button is lit, specifying the chord on the Lower keyboard sound (p. 214]. starts the intro, and again, a countdown is given. À

To stop the countdown, press the [Count Down] button, turning off the indicator light. Rhythm and Automatic The Arranger function of the ATELIER can add an Automatic Accompaniment to each Rhythm. Based on the selected Rhythm, the Arranger function automatically adds an accompaniment that is suitable for the chord being companimen pressed on the Lower keyboard.

Arranger On/Off Press the Arranger [On/Off] button (indicator lights.) Arranger [On/Off] button Function Lit Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment Unlit Rhythm Start the rhythm [p. 85). The rhythm and the automatic accompaniment will play together. If the Arranger [On/Of] button is ON and no Pedal Bass voice is selected, the Automatic Accompaniment will play the bass sound. When the Arranger [On/Off] button is on, Sync Start (p. 86) on the pedalboard cannot be used. The lower voice is not played during the performance of the intro and ending, even when the Lower keyboard is played

IE AT-900_e.book 89 K—: 2007#9A7A &MA ÆFASHA 35 HE: æ)| Using Rhythm Performance You can add variety to the rhythm or automatic accompaniment by changing the rhythm pattern of the rhythm or the arrangement of the automatic accompaniment, or by inserting a break [i.e., stopping the rhythm for one measure). Auto Break Fill In Button name Function À fillin will automatically be added when you press a Variation button to change the accompaniment or rhythm arrangement. Fill In [Auto] button [Break] button Stop the rhythm at the end of that measure [Break]. What's a fill-in? A Fill In is a short phrase that is inserted at a break in the melody or at a point where the character of the song changes [between Chorus's or Verses). Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and Accompaniment (Variation) You can change the arrangement of the accompaniment. This function is called “Variation.” For each rhythm, there are four types of arrangement for the accompaniment. The following buttons are called Variation buttons. Variation Press the Variation buttons to change the arrangement of the accompaniment. The indicator of the button you pressed will light. The Variation [1] button produces the simplest arrangement, and the [Full] button produces the most florid. For an intro or ending, Variation [1] is the shortest and simples. The functions of the Variation buttons and [Break] button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal. Please refer to “Changing the Function of the Foot Switch” (p. 134) You can change the behavior of the Fill In [Auto] button and [Break] button (p. 215).

| & AT-900_e.book 90 K—> 2007#9A7E HA +FAM8H439 an. Using Rhythm Performance ER CT] ae) Playing Chords with Simple Fingering (Chord Intelligence) “Chord Intelligence” is a feature that intelligently plays the correct accompaniment chords the moment you play a key specifying a chord on the Lower keyboard during Automatic Accompaniment. For example, in order to make the instrument detect a “C Major” chord, you must normally play the three keys “C," “E," and “G." If you use the Chord Intelligence function, you can simply press a single “C” key in the lower keyboard to sound a C Major chord with the voice selected for the Lower part. T. Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears. P.1/5 DES Æ Rhythm CHE BigAppleBand MidniteSISg M Rec/Play BennysBigBnd Orch.Sning | Ce er

2. Touch< G- {Utility} on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears. P.1/5 DES

For more information about chord fingering, refer to the “Chord List’ [p. 277). You can also open the rhythm screen by pressing a Rhythm button. IF you press the root note of the chord {p. 279] in the lower keyboard when the Chord D Intelligence function is ON, all notes in that chord will sound. For example, if you press the root “C” of the C major chord in the lower keyboard, the notes of the C major chord "C," “E," and “G" will be sounded by the voice selected for the lower part.

Touch <Options>. The Rhythm Options screen appears. EI Rhythm Options

\« Roc/PIay Play Touch the Chord Intelligence setting to turn it “ON.” The Chord Intelligence function can now be used. Each time you touch the Chord Intelligence setting, it will be switched ON/ OFF. If you wish to turn off the Chord Intelligence function, switch it “OFF.” When the Leading Bass function (p. 92] is on and the Chord Intelligence function is off, you can specify chords with a combination of the lower keyboard and pedalboard. When you touch the [One Touch Program] button, the Chord Intelligence setting will automatically be turned ON.

Leading Bass Function

When Automatic Accompaniment is used, and the Pedal [To Lower] button is ON, the Pedal Bass voice will normally play the root note {p. 279] of the chord you play on the Lower keyboard. IFthe Leading Bass function is enabled, the lowest note of the chord you play on the Lower keyboard will then be used as the bass note [the bottom note of the chord). This allows the bass to be a note other than the root of the chord you play and the bass note will change when inverted chords are played (p. 279). Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears. #8 P1/5 En) | Touch < G- {Utility} on the Rhythm screen. The Utility screen appears. MERp You can also open the Rhythm screen by pressing the Rhythm buttons. When the Leading Bass function is on and the Chord Intelligence function (p. 90] is off, you can specify chords with a combination of the lower keyboard and pedalboard.

The Rhythm Options screen appears. EI Rhythm Options You can assign the Leading Bass functions to either of the foot switches located on each side of he Expression Pedal.

4. Touch the Leading Bass seHting to turn it “ON.” Please refer to “Changing he

Function of the Foot Switch” (p. Each time you touch the Leading Bass setting, it will be switched ON/OFF. 134

5. To turn off the Leading Bass function, set the Leading Bass

Using Rhythm Performance A Simple Way to Make Automatic Accompaniment Settings (One Touch Program) The ATELIER provides a very convenient [One Touch Program] button. By simply pressing this button once, the Arranger function will be turned ON, and keyboard voices that are most appropriate for playing with the currently selected Rhythm/Automatic Accompaniment are selected. By pressing the [One Touch Program] button, you can make the following settings. + Panel settings {e.g., sounds and volume) suitable for the rhythm + Arranger [On/Of] button lit [Automatic Accompaniment playing) + [Sync Stari] button lit, [Intro] button blinking (Waiting for Sync Start) + Chord Intelligence function is ON {p. 90] What is Sync Start? Sync Start is a function that starts the rhythm at the moment that you play the à lower keyboard. ‘6: SA SA What is Chord Intelligence? “Chord Intelligence” is a feature that intelligently decides on accompaniment chords the moment you play some keys specifying a chord during automatic accompaniment. The panel settings specified by the One Touch Program function are as follows. 8 panel settings for each rhythm [4 panel settings x 2 groups] 2 Group (Organ) 1 Group (Basic) Rhythm | 94

en When you press the [One The [One Touch Program] button's indicator will light. Touch Program] button, the “Arranger Update” setting will automatically change to “INSTANT” (p. 109). One Touch Program An One Touch Program Group (One Touch Program Group select} screen like the one shown below will be displayed for several seconds. Transpose

o NS <} à © : Lu To redisplay the One Touch

3. While the One Touch Program Group screen is displayed, Program Group screen, while

touch the screen to select a One Touch Program group. holding down the Registration [Write] button, press the [One IF you fail to select a One Touch Program group while the One Touch Program Touch Program] button. Group screen is displayed, “Basic” will be selected automatically. Touch the One Touch Program Group screen to reselect the Panel settings appropriate for the rhythm and automatic accompaniment will group automatically be called up for Registration [1]-[4] buttons.

4. Press the Registration [1] - [4] button to select panel settings.

5. Onthe Lower keyboard, play a chord.

Atthe moment you play the lower keyboard, the Intro will begin, and then the Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will play.

6. Press the [Ending] or [Start/Stop] button to stop the

Rhythm. Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment stops. oops The One Touch Program

7. Press the [One Touch Program] button, extinguishing its function mal be turned off

indicator. you're using the Quick : : : : : Registration function (p. 37) or You will return to the panel settings that were in effect prior to pressing the i you've loaded a registration [One Touch Program] button. (p. 108).

| & AT-900_e.book 96 <—> 2007#9A7E HA FAM8H439 an. Using Rhythm Performance Using a Rhythm from a USB Memory The ATELIER contains a variety of rhythms, but you can also use rhythms from USB memory or floppy disk to perform rhythms in an even wider range of All rights reserved. styles. Unauthorized use of commercially available Music Style disk for purposes other Reviewing the Rhythms on USB Memory than privale, personal enjoyment is a violation of T. Press the Rhythm [User] button (confirm that its indicator is lit). applicable laws. The Rhythm screen appears. Æ Rhythn (3 IF you copy rhythms from USB 6/8 Ballad memory or floppy disk into user memory (p. 82), you'll be able À ts ho hs mp MarchingBand by pressing the [User] button (p.971.

2. Connect the USB memory containing the rhythms to the 1 you want to use rhythms from sn —

external memory connector. a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.

3. Touch <—}>< +}> to select ‘Ext Memory” and see the

rhythms in USB memory. The Rhythm screen will show the Rhythms on the USB memory. E rytim © ( IF” User” is selected, ihe rhyihms saved in User memory {p. 82) wil be shown. 6/8 Ballad IF “Disk” is selected, the rhythms saved on the floppy disk will be MerchingBand

4. Touch the Rhythm screen to select a Rhythm.

The [Start/Stop] button indicator will blink while the Rhythms are being loaded into internal memory.When loading is finished, you will be able to play the selected rhythm.

5. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

The selected Rhythm is played.

Copying Rhythms User memory (p. 82) already contains rhythms, but you can replace these rhythms with rhythms from USB memory or floppy disk. Rhythms copied from the USB memory into User memory will not be lost even if the power is turned off. lt is convenient to copy frequenily-used Rhythms into User memory. Rhythms that you've created and saved in user memory can also be copied to USB memory [p. 99). Copying Rhythms from USB Memory to User Memory 1: Connect the USB memory to the external memory connector. IF you want to copy rhythms from floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext

2. Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen. Drive connector.

The Rhythm screen appears. Æ Rhyt P.1/5 DES BigAppleBand MidniteSISg

3. Touch < 3: (Viility) on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears. ni 97

Touch <File Edit>. The Rhythm File Edit screen appears. ET Rhythm File Edit Touch <Copy> (Rhythm Copy). The Rhythm File Copy screen appears. I Rhythm File Copy Touch < —}> < +}> to select the media [the location of the rhythm you want to copy). IF you want to copy a rhythm from USB memory, select “Ext Memory." IF you want to copy a rhythm from floppy disk, select “Disk.” Touch <E-0- to select the rhythm you want to copy. Touch User <0--G- to select the copy-destination number. Numbers for which a rhythm name is shown already have a rhythm saved to them.

| & AT-900_e.book 99 K—:; 2007#9A7A MA ÆFASHA 35 Using Rhythm Performance Touch <Execute>. The copying of the rhythm to User memory begins. Once the Rhythm has been accommodated in memory, the Rhythm File Edit screen will reappear. IF you select a number in which a rhythm is already saved, a screen like the following will appear. A overurite Rhythm OK? IF you want to delete the previously saved rhythm and overwrite it with the rhythm you're newly saving, touch <OK>. IF you don't want to delete the previously saved rhythm, touch <Cancel>, then select a number at which no rhythm has been saved, and copy the rhythm to that number. Copying Rhythms from User Memory to USB Memory You can copy rhythms from user memory to USB memory. In this case, touch the arrow icon located in the center of the “Rhythm File Copy screen” in step 5 of the above procedure, so the arrow points upwards. In this state, you'll be copying rhythms from user memory to USB memory. I Rhythm File Copy

The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying rhythms from USB memory to user memory. Never remove the USB memory or turn off the power while the rhythm data is being copied from USB memory into the ATELIER. If you do so, the rhythm data will not be loaded into the ATELIER, and malfunctions could result. After returning the rhythm stored in the user memory to the factory settings (p. 230), copy the rhythm from USB memory once more. You can return only the user memory to the factory settings. Refer to “Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings” (p. 230).

Changing the Order of the Saved Rhythms You can rearrange the order of the rhythms stored in User memory (p. 82] or USB memory. T. Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears. 1 Rhythm CHE BigAppleBand MidniteSISg Sound/KB) BennysBigBnd Orch.Sing 0e er

2. Touch< G- {Utility} on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears. 1 Rhyth}

The Rhythm File Edit screen appears. ET Rhythm File Edit 02:6/8 Ballad 08:Trad Tango O4:MarchingBand Button Meaning Description The Rename screen appears. You can touch the Rename | Modif the name | en and rename the selected rhythm (p. 102). Change the order | The selected rhythm will be moved earlier in the You can copy rhythms from USB memory to user Copy Copies the rhythm | memory, or copy rhythms from user memory to USB memory (p. 97). UP (upward) order. £ Change the order | The selected rhythm will be moved later in the 3 Down £ {downward) order. 5 Delete Delete the Rhythm | The selected rhythm will be deleted {p. 104). Ÿ | <} i ©

Choose “User” if you want to change the order of the rhythms saved in user memory, or choose “Ext Memory” if you want to change the order of the rhythms saved in USB memory.

You can rename rhythms stored in User memory [p. 82) or USB memory. Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears. Touch < G- {Utility} on the Rhythm screen. The Utility screen appears. P1/5 Touch <File Edit>. The Rhythm File Edit screen appears. ET Rhythm File Edit Touch < —}> < +}> to select the desired media. Choose “User” if you want to change the name of the rhythms saved in user memory, or choose “Ext Memory” if you want to change the name of the rhythms saved in USB memory. Touch <E-0- to select the rhythm whose name you want to change.

The Rename screen appears. lowercase/symbols. Each touch of the character switch button takes you to the next available choice, like this: uppercase — lowercase -» symbols — uppercase … 5

8. Touch the screen to specify the desired character. $

| The following characters can be selected. Ÿ | Uppercase ABCDEFGHIJKIMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 8 lowercae |abcdefghijkimnopqrstuvwxyz Symbols ["#%&'()*+,-./:=221 0123456789 Del Delete a character. Space Insert a space. Move the cursor [the symbol that indicates the location at

which characters will be input] to left or right. To cancel the operation, touch <Cancel>.

9. When you're done making the settings, touch <OK>.

The Rhythm has now been named. The Edit User screen reappears. TO. Touch <Exit>.

Deleting Saved Rhythm You can delete rhythms stored in User memory (p. 82] or USB memory. T. Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < G- {Utility} on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears. O8 “er

3. Touch <File Edit. =

The Rhythm File Edit screen appears. ET Rhythm File Edit Button Meaning Description The Rename screen appears. You can touch the Rename | Modif the name | een and rename the selected rhythm {p. 102). Change the order | The selected rhythm will be moved earlier in the UP (upward) order (p. 100). Change the order | The selected rhythm will be moved later in the Down | ounward) order (p. 100). Delete Delete the Rhythm | The selected rhythm will be deleted. You can copy rhythms from USB memory to user Copy Copies the rhythm | memory, or copy rhythms from user memory to USB memory (p. 97).

Choose “User” if you want to delete the rhythm saved in user memory, or choose “Ext Memory” if you want to delete the rhythm saved in USB memory.

5. |> to select the rhythm that you wish to

The following display appears. A Delete Rhythm OK?

To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>. £

& 7. you are sure that you wish to delete the rhythm, touch 5 © <OK>. $ When a rhythm is deleted, the deleted rhythm name will change to "----- . I Rhythm File Edit 02:6/8 Ballad 08:Trad Tango O4:MarchingBand

ll Using the Registration Buttons IE AT-900_e.book 106 X— 2007#9A7H &HA F8#43 The ATELIER allows you to store sound settings and panel settings in the Registration buttons. The ATELIER has a total of twelve registration buttons, and one set of panel settings can be registered to each button, for a total of twelve types of panel settings. Each set of panel settings that has been stored in a Registration button is called a “Registration.” This provides a convenient way to change large numbers of panel settings during a performance, or to recall a complex panel setting. Settings that have been stored to Registration buttons [1]-[12] are remembered even if the power is turned off. If you wish to restore the settings stored in the Registration buttons to their factory settings, use the “Factory Reset” operation (p. 27) About the Registration Buttons In addition to assigning voices and rhythms to the Registration buttons, you can also store the following settings: Panel button settings [for example, settings for the Level [A] [W] buttons and Solo [To Lower] button, etc.] Controller settings [functions assigned to foot switches, pitch bend range, etc.] Other types of settings (reverb type, tempo settings, degree of initial touch, eic.] IF you would like to know all of the settings that can be recorded to the Registration buttons, refer to “Settings That Are Stored In the Individual Registration Buttons” {p. 281). The twelve settings stored at the registration buttons can be saved as a “set” in USB memory, a floppy disk, or user memory (p. 113]. In addition to the settings saved to the Registration buttons, the following data is also saved when Registration sets are saved.

Registration Name -»p. 111 Registration Shift p. 135 Arranger Update -»p. 109 Trans. Update (Transpose Update] -p. 217 Exp. Curve [Expression Curve] -p. 137 Recorded performance data and rhythms from User memory {p. 82) are not stored in Registration sets. When a rhythm saved in User memory is assigned to a Registration set, that rhythm is copied beforehand to the User memory.

Using the Registration Buttons Procedure for Creating Registration Sets Prepare the Registrations A convenient way to make the sequence of Registration buttons to be pressed easy to understand is to store the panel settings starting from the Registration [1] button, continuing with subsequent buttons in accordance with the progression of the song. Save the Registrations to the USB memory or User memory If you want to use more than twelve Registrations in a song, save the settings for Registration buttons [1]-[12] to a USB memory or User memory as a set, then continue to store further panel settings again, starting from Registration button [1]. Save all of the Registration sets you have set to the USB memory or user memory. Arrange the Registrations in the sequence they are to be used Save the Registration sets to the USB memory or user memory in the order they are to be used in the song. You can use the File Edit function (p. 124] to alter the sequence and names of registrations contained on the USB memory or User memory (p. 111) as well as delete such registrations {p. 122). Using Registration Sets Call up the Registration sets saved on the USB memory to the ATELIER @ Insert the USB memory containing the saved Registration sets into the external ‘6: memory connector, and read the Registration sets into the ATELIER. MEMb Switch the Registration sets as you perform You can also assign the "Right + Load Next” to the foot switch Press the Registration buttons to switch Registrations as you play the song. and use i to cal up subsequent To call up the next Registration Set, press the [Load Next] button, then press Registration sets [p. 135). the Registration buttons.

ng Registrat: G)8/)/0 F F \ For details on the settings that are stored in a Registration, refer to “Settings That Are 1 Make all the panel settings that you wish to store. Stored In the Registration Buttons” (p. 281)

2. While holding down the [Write] button, press one of the

Registration buttons [1]-[12]. The panel settings will be stored in the selected Registration button.

4 AT-900_e.book 108 X— 2007#9A7H &HA F8#43 Using the Registration Buttons Recalling a Registration Settings that have been registered to Registration buttons [1]-[12] can be recalled in two ways: “INSTANT” and “DELAYED." At the factory this is set to “DELAYED.” How to Recall a Registration (DELAYED) Recalling Voices and Other Panel Settings

1. Press and immediately release one of the Registration

buttons [1]-[12]. Recalling Settings for Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment in Addition to the Panel Settings 1: Press and hold a Registration button [11-12] for several seconds. The indicator of the rhythm select button will blink, and the panel settings and settings related to rhythm performance and automatic accompaniment will be recalled. How to Recall a Registration (INSTANT) Recalling panel settings of a voice, or when recalling settings for rhythm performance and Automatic Accompaniment in addition to panel settings

1. Press and immediately release one of the Registration

When changing the way. Registrations are called up, refer to “Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations” (p. 109)

Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations Settings for Rhythm play and Automatic Accompaniment are recalled when you continue holding a Registration button [1]-[12] for several seconds, but you can change this so that the settings are recalled the instant you press the button.

1. Touch <Registration> on the Main screen. ED

The Registration Load screen appears. You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] ration Load k button on the panel.

2. Touch <B> (Uility).

The Utility screen appears. ration Load

The Registration Options screen appears. You can also use the following method to open the Registration Options screen. ration 0 1 1. Touch <Quick Guide> on the Main screen, to display the Quick Guide screen. Arranger Upc INSTANT Li Roc/Piay : ï INSTANT ES [Write] button.

2. Press the Registration

The Registration Options screen appears.

4. Touch the Arranger Update setting to switch between

“DELAYED” and “INSTANT.” Each time you touch the Arranger Update setting, it will alternate between “DELAYED” and “INSTANT.” Setting Descriptions When you press and hold a Registration button [1]-[12] for several seconds, the settings for Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled in addition to the panel settings. If you press and immediately release a Registration button [1]- [12], only the settings that are not related to Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled. DELAYED The panel settings and settings for Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled the instant that you press a Registration button [1]-[12]. INSTANT

Automatically Registering When Y When the [Manual] button is ON {lit}, all panel settings you make will be stored automatically in the [Manual] button as they are made, thus updating the Registration that had been previously saved.

You can change the timing of recalling the transpose setting when you press a Registration button. For details refer to “Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled” [p. 217]. The settings stored in the [Manual] button will return to their default values when the power is turned off.

When saving Registration sets, names like “Factory Reg.” will be assigned by default, but you can assign a name that will help you later to identify the contents of the Registration set. 1: Touch <Registration> on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears. ration Load Play A Registration |

2. Touch <go to Savez.

The Registration Save screen appears.

The Rename screen appears. Factory Reg.

The following characters can be selected. Uppercase ABCDEFGHIJKIMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Lowercase abcdefghijkimnoparstuvwxyz Symbols I"#%&'(]*+,-./:=2N 0123456789 Del Delete a character. Space Insert a space. Move the cursor [the symbol that indicates the location at æ) +) which characters will be input] to left or right. To cancel the operation, touch <Cancel>.

7. When you're done making the settings, touch <OK>.

The Registration set in the ATELIER's internal memory has now been named. The Rename screen can also be opened in the following ways. Main screen <Registration>—? Registration Load screen <Uïility>-> Utility screen <Rename>

Using the Registration Buttons Saving Registration Sets With the settings of Registration buttons [1]-[12] considered as one set, you can store the registration set to USB memory or User memory. We recommend that complex panel settings or Registrations you wish to keep be saved on USB memory. Furthermore, when you save registrations created on the ATELIER to USB memory, you can call up their settings on other ATELIER Series instruments and use the registrations the same way. T. Connect your USB memory to the external memory connector. IF you want to save registration data to a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector. Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk that was formatted by the ATELIER.

2. Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.

The Registration Load screen appears.

3. Touch <go to Savez.

The Registration Save screen appears. IFyou wish to assign a name before you save, refer to “Assigning a Name to a Registration Set” {p. 111).

Touch < —}> < +}> to select the desired media. IF you want to save the registration to user memory, select “User.” IF you want to save the registration to USB memory, select “Ext Memory." If you want to save the registration to floppy disk, select “Disk.” E-- 62- in the screen to select the save- destination number. Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be displayed To cancel the Save operation, touch the <Exit> button to close the Registration Save screen. Touch <Save>. The Save Format screen appears. Gr) Touch <Original> or <R-Series>. Settings Description Save formats that can be used with the AT-900, AT-900C and AT-800 Original | When saved in this format, the data can also be used by AT-SL Series, AT-45, AT-15 and AT-S Series devices. R-Series Save formats that can be used with ATR Series devices

Saving of the registration data will begin. When saving ends, the "----- in the screen will change to the registration name that you saved. If you've named the registration, it will be saved with that name. If the following screen appears If you select a number at which a registration has already been saved and touch <Save>, the following screen appears. ÂÀ Overurite Registration OK? If you wish to update the contents of the Registration data

2. Inthe Registration Save screen, select the number that is

displayed as “-----” (a number that currently does not contain registration data).

3. Save the Registration (p. 113).

When saving is complete, the saved registration name will be displayed.

IE AT-900_e.book 116 X—% 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#43 Using the Registration Buttons Loading Previously Saved Registration Sets Into the ATELIER Here's how to recall a previously saved Registration set from the User memory or USB memory into the memory of the ATELIER. Registrations can be selected in the following three ways. Loading a Set of Registrations (Load) > p. 116 You can load a “set” {a collection of settings for Registration buttons [1]-[12]) from USB memory or user memory. Loading an Individual Registration (Load One) + p. 117 Recall the settings of one of the Registration [1]-[12] buttons. Recalling the Order that the Registrations are Saved on the USB memory or user memory (Load Next) > p. 120 Press the [Load Next] button to recall registration sets in the order in which they are saved on the USB memory or user memory. Loading a Set of Registrations

If you want to load a registration from USB memory, connect your USB memory to the external memory connector. IF you want to load a registration from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk containing the registration into the floppy disk drive. Touch <Registration> on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears. O2:REGIST-02 O3:REGIST-03 O4REGIST-04 Be aware that when you load Registrations from a USB memory or user memory, the Registrations that were previously in internal memory Will be lost. It is a good idea to save important Registrations to USB memory or user memory {p. 113). MERp You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button. When you touch <go to Save>, the instrument jumps to the Registration Save screen.

If you want to load from the registration of user memory, select “User.”

Using the Registration Buttons IF you want to load from the registration of USB memory, select “Ext Memory." IF you want to load from the registration of floppy disk, select “Disk.” <&- to select the Registration that you wish To select a regsroron from a folder, refer to “Selecting a to load into internal memory. registration from within a To cancel operation, touch <Exit>. folder” (p. 126]

The registration data will start being load. When the Registration has been loaded, the Registration Load screen will reappear. Loading an Individual Registration T. you want to load a registration from USB memory, connect your USB memory to the external memory SA connector. IF you want to load a registration from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk containing the registration into the floppy disk drive. suopng uonensiex eur Buisn

2. Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.

The Registration Load screen appears. You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] tion Load = button. O2:REGIST-02 O3:REGIST-03 O4REGIST-04 Main

3. Touch < —}> < +}> to select the desired media.

If you want to load from the registration of user memory, select “User.” IF you want to load from the registration of USB memory, select “Ext Memory." IF you want to load from the registration of floppy disk, select “Disk.”

4. Touch --0- to select the registration that you wish

to load into internal memory.

The Load One Registration screen appears.

7. Touch <1>-<12> to select the number of the registration

button that you wish to load from disk into internal memory. ni 118

8. Touch Internal <1>-<12> to select the number of the

storage-destination button. To cancel this operation, touch <Cancel>.

9. When you're done making the settings, touch <OK>.

The following display appears. Executing..

When the Registration has been loaded, the Registration Load screen will reappear.

Using the Registration Buttons | | Recalling the Order that the Registrations are Saved (Load Next) You can simply press the [Load Next] button to successively recall registrations in the order in which they were saved on the USB memory or user memory. By using he “File Edit” function, This function is called “Load Next.” you can modify the order or the When you will be performing live, you can save registration sets to USB name ofthe registrations saved . Le k | . on USB memory or user memory in the order in which you will be performing. Then while you perform, memory, or delete an unwanted you can recall the next registration set easily and smoothly. registration (p. 111, p. 122, p. There are two [Load Nexi] buttons. Pressing either one will produce the same 124) result. T. you want to load a registration from USB memory, You can also assign the connect your USB memory to the external memory lRight+Load Nex” function to connector. Regist Shift, and use the foot switch to operate the Next Load If you want to load a registration from a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk function. & drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk containing the FS

registration into the floppy disk drive.

2. Press the [Load Next] button.

The first registration saved on the USB memory will be recalled into the Return to the ATELIER. registration that had been Undo selected before The following screen appears. you pressed the fload Nexi] button. Button Description Finalize the registration. lt will not be possible to REGIST-02 % return to the previous do registration

3. Press one of the registration [1]-[12] buttons. 1 of performing step 3,

The registration will be loaded [recalled into internal memory]. you can also load the registration by touching <OK> in the screen

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to successively recall the registration

| & AT-900_e.book 121 K—% 2007#9A7H HA +FH8#439 & ||@ an. Using the Registration Buttons T . . : NY Checking the next registration set TL. Access the Main screen. Transpose

2. Touch the < re] > icon several times to switch to < © > (Regist).

The Main screen display will switch to the registration. Transpose |.

“Next” will indicate the name of the next registration set.

Using the Registration Buttons Deleting a Set of Registrations Here's how to delete a Registration set that was saved to a USB memory, User memory, or floppy disk. 1: Prepare the registration that you want to delete. IF you want to delete registration data from the USB memory, connect the USB memory to the external memory connector. IF you want to delete registration data from the floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector. Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk that was formatted by the ATELIER.

2. Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.

The Registration Load screen appears.

The Registration File Edit screen appears. KA © 02:REGIST-02 O3:REGIST-03 OA:REGIST-04 OS:REGIST-05 Button Meaning Description The Rename screen appears. You can Rename Modify the name touch the screen and rename the selected registration (p. 111). u Change the order The selected registration will be P (upward) moved earlier in the order [p. 124). Down Change the order The selected registration will be {downward) moved later in the order (p. 124). Delete Delete the Registration The selected registration will be deleted. Create Create new folder À new folder will be created (p. 125). You can copy registration from USB Co Copies the memory to user memory, or copy PY Registration registration from user memory to USB memory (p. 127). | 122

Touch < —}> < +}> to select the desired media. IF you want to delete from the registration to user memory, select “User.” IF you want to delete from the registration to USB memory, select “Ext Memory." IF you want to delete from the registration to floppy disk, select “Disk.” |> to select the registration that you wish Touch <| to delete. Touch <Deletez. The following display appears. À Delte Registration OK? To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>. If you are sure that you wish to delete the registration, touch <OK>. When the Registration has been deleted, the Registration File Edit screen will reappear. When a registration is deleted, the deleted registration name will change to OTREGIST-01 02:REGIST-02 O3:REGIST-03 A Registration | Main

Fe MNT PE TTET Using the Registration Buttons teens CT] ae) Changing the Name or Order of Registration After saving registrations on USB memory, user memory, or floppy disk, you can change the order or name of the registrations, or delete a registration [p. 122). This is very convenient when you are preparing to use the [Load Next] button [Load Next function > p. 120] to recall successive registrations while you play. T° Prepare the registration(s) that you want to rename or sort. IF you want to rename or sort registrations saved on USB memory, connect your USB memory to the external memory connector. IF you want to rename or sort registrations saved on a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the external memory connector.

2. Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.

The Registration Load screen appears. ration Load O2:REGIST-02 O3:REGIST-03

The Registration File Edit screen appears. ni 124

il Il Using the Registration Buttons > < +}> to select the desired media. Choose “Ext Memory” if you want to rename or sort registrations saved on USB memory, or “Disk” if you want to rename or sort registrations saved on a floppy disk. Choose “User” if you want to rename or sort registrations saved in user memory.

5. Touch O--0- in the screen to select a registration.

Changing the Order of Registration

6. Touch <Up> or <Down> to move the registration.

Button Mean Description Change the order The selected registration will be Up es {upward) moved earlier in the order. Dow Change the order The selected registration will be " {downward) moved later in the order. Changing the Name of the Registration

The Rename screen appears. Rename the registration as described in “Assigning a Name to a Registration Set p.111].

Creating a Folder About folders The ATELIER lets you create up to 99 registration sets. IF you create a folder, you'll be able to save up to 99 sets in each folder. You can create as many folders as you wish, limited only by the capacity ofthe media. If''s a good idea to save the registrations in a folder for each song. IFthere's a registration that you want to delete, touch <<: vec te registration, then touch <Delete>. When a message asking you to confirm the deletion appears, touch <OK>. MERp You can rename the folder in the Registration File Edit screen

A screen Will appear, allowing you to specify a name for the new folder.

10. Assign a name to the folder.

Touch the screen to specify the desired characters. Rename the folder as described in “Assigning a Name to a Registration Set” {@. 111). T1. When you've finished, touch <OK>. A new folder with the name you assigned will be created. Selecting a registration from within a folder T.Touch <Registration> on the Main screen to display the Registration Load screen.

2. Touch ÆS-<W- to select a folder.

Touch the folder name. The registrations in the folder will be displayed. Æ.Touch the registration name. To exit the folder TeTouch <PS-<E3- to select “UP.”

2. Touch the “UP” indication.

You can't use lowercase letters in the folder name. You can't create a folder that has the same name as an already-existing folder. Aliernatively, you can touch ÆD-&- to select the folder name, and hen press the [Play/Stop] button on the panel to view the registrations in the folder.

| & AT-900_e.book 127 K— 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#43 Using the Registration Buttons Copying Registrations Registrations from USB memory or floppy disk can be copied to user memory. If a registration saved in USB memory or on a floppy disk is stored in user memory, the stored registration data will not disappear even when you turn off the power. lt is convenient to load frequenily-used registration into User memory. Registrations saved in user memory can also be copied to USB memory (p. 129). Copying Registration from USB Memory to User Memory 1: Connect the USB memory to the external memory connector.

2. Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.

The Registration File Edit screen appears. 02:REGIST-02 O3:REGIST-03 OA:REGIST-04 OS:REGIST-05 IF you want to copy registration from floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector.

Touch <Copy>. The Registration File Copy screen appears.

Touch < —}> < +}> to select the media [the location of the registration you want to copy). If you want to copy a registration from USB memory, select “Ext Memory.” IF you want to copy a registration from floppy disk, select “Disk.” Touch <E-0- to select the registration you want to copy.

Touch User <0--- to select the copy-destination number. Numbers for which a registration name is shown already have a rhythm saved to them. Touch <Execute>. The copying of the registration to User memory begins. Once the registration has been accommodated in memory, the Registration File Edit screen will reappear. Never remove the USB memory or turn off the power while the registration data is being copied from USB memory into the ATELIER. If you do so, the registration data will not be loaded into the ATELIER, and malfunctions could result. After returning the registration stored in the user memory to the factory settings (p. 230), re- load the registration from USB memory.

Using the Registration Buttons IF you select a number in which a registration is already saved, a screen like the following will appear. You can return only the user À overvrite Registration OK? memory lo the factory settings. Refer to “Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings”{p. 230). IF you want to delete the previously saved registration and overwrite it with the registration you're newly saving, touch <OK>. IF you don't want to delete the previously saved registration, touch <Cancel>, then select a number at which no registration has been saved, and copy the registration to that number. Copying Registration from User Memory to USB Memory You can copy registration from user memory to USB memory. In this case, touch the arrow icon located in the center of the “Registration File

Copy screen” in step 4 of the above procedure, so the arrow points upwards. In this state, you'll be copying registration from user memory to USB memory.

Main The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying registration from USB memory to user memory.

ll Using the Performance Functions Transposing to a Different Key (Key Transpose) You can transpose the key of a performance without having to shift the position of your fingers on the keyboard. This feature is called “Key Transpose.” For example, even ifthe song is in a difficult key with numerous sharps or flats, you can transpose it to a key that is easier for you to play. Transpose 1: Set the value for the transposition with the Transpose [-] and [+] buttons. The transposition setting is Each time you press a Transpose [+] [+] button, the pitch will be transposed by stored in the Registration. For a semitone. details on the settings that are : : stored in the Registration, refer Acceptable values range from A}, to G [in semitone steps). to “Settings That Are Stored In A The specified value will be displayed in the Main screen. the Registration Buttons” (p. À @ 281) @

State of the Transpose [-] [+] buttons IF transposed {non-C] One of the Transpose [+ [+] button indicators is lit. The Transpose [ [+] button indicators are If not transposed [C) exinguished By pressing the Transpose [-] [+] buttons simultaneously, you can restore the default setting C. You can change the timing at which the transposition settings saved in a Registration will be recalled. For details refer to “Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled” [p. 217].

Using the Performance Functions Adjusting the Brighiness of the Sound Using the [Brilliance] slider, you can adjust the brighiness of the sound. For a brighter sound, push the slider away from you. For a mellower sound, pull the slider toward you.

This setting is not stored in the or Registration. Briliance You can adjust not only the treble range but the bass as well with the [Brilliance] slider. You can suppress the lower frequencies by moving the slider downwards. ding Decay to the Sound (Damper Peda @ When you depress the Damper (Sustain) pedal, a decay effect will be added to the voices. The explanation at left uses an illustration of the AT-900. While you continue depressing the damper pedal, notes will be sustained even if you release the keys. You can modify the setting so that decay is only applied to notes played on the Upper keyboard [p. 212). Decay cannot be added to the

Suorjoun4 soueuuoye4 eui Buisn Solo voices. By default the decay effect will be applied to the voices played on the Lower Decay can be applied to Pedal keyboard. Bass voices played on the Lower keyboard (when the Pedal [To Lower] or [Bass Split] button indicators are lif]. In this case, a decay will not be applied to the pedal bass voice. MERp You can connect a pedal keyboard [PK series; sold separately] to the AT-900C and use the pedal keyboard's hold pedal to sustain the sound.

Using the Performance Functions

When you move the Pitch Bend/Vibrato lever to the left or right, you can obtain a smooth change in the pitch of the notes being played (Pitch Bend effect}. Move the lever to the right to raise the pitch, and to the left to lower it. Also, when you push the lever away from you, a vibrato effect can be obtained. Vibrato Effect Pitch Bend Effect By default [immediately after the power is turned on] the Pitch Bend effect is added to the voices of all the sections being played on the Upper keyboard. You can also adjust the range of the pitch which is shifted by the Pitch Bend lever. For details, refer to “Changing the Pitch Bend Range” (p. 213). Please note that only the appropriate voices will allow vibrato to be added. You can change the settings so that both the Pitch Bend and Vibrato effects are applied to the Lower keyboard voice or the voices on the Pedalboard. Please refer to “Choosing the keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will apply” (p. 212)

À & IE AT-900_e.book 133 X—> 2007Æ9A7H &HA F8#439 & ||@ Using the Performance Functions Using the Foot Switches On either side of the expression pedal are two Foot Switches. Different functions are assigned to each of these two foot switches. NEMb You can connect a pedal keyboard (PK series; sold separately] to the AT-900C and use 1he pedal keyboard's foot switch. IF'Regist Shi” is turned “RIGHT,” LEFT,” or “RIGHT You can also change the functions assigned to the left and right Foot Switches. +load Next,” the foot switch Please refer to “Changing the Function of the Foot Switch” [p. 134). will function only lo switch registrations [p. 135) With the factory settings, the following functions are assigned to the left and right Foot Switches. Switch the Rotary effect between Fast/Slow. est Right Foot Switch If Rotary is turned on, the Rotary effect will switch between “Fast” and “Slow” each time you press the Foot Switch. Glide [an effect by which the pitch is lowered by a semitone while the foot switch is pressed, and is returned to what is The Glide effect will only be . originally was when you release your foot]. applied to the keyboard section Left Foot Switch | Wie you are pressing the Foot Switch, the pitch will be Hhat has been specified as temporarily lowered. When you release the Foot Switch, the being the destination for the pitch will return to normal gradually. Pitch bend/Vibrato lever. Please refer to “Choosing the keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will apply” (p. 212) Suorjoun4 soueuuoye4 eui Buisn You can store functions to be assigned to the foot switch to individual Registration buttons [p. 107).

ae) CT] Changing the Function of the Foot Switch You can select any of the following functions and assign them to either Foot Switch on the right or left side of the Expression Pedal.

Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. Touch <Controller>. The Controller screen appears. Touch <£%-<Œ2- to display the L Foot Switch or R Foot Switch. Touch <L Foot Switch> or <R Foot Switch> setting. ST/SLOW LL) ar" Touch < —}>< +]|> to change the setting. Touch <Exit>. IFthe ’Regist Shift (Registration Shifi]” setting is “RIGHT,” “LEFT,” or “RIGHT + Load next,” the Foot Switch will be dedicated to switching through the Registrations, and the "R Foot Switch” or “L Foot Switch” setting will be ignored [p. 135). MED This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Switch the Rotary speed between “FAST” and "SLOW.” GLIDE While the Foot Switch is pressed, the pitch will temporarily be lowered, and will gradually return to normal when you release the Foot Switch. When the power is turned on, Glide effect is added to the voice of all the sections being played on Upper keyboard. LEADING BASS The Leading Bass function [p. 92] will operate only while you continue pressing the Foot Switch.

The same function as the Composer [Play/Stop] button. Each time you press the Foot Switch, the performance data will play back or stop. INTRO/ENDING Play an Intro or Ending. VARIATION UP Switches the Variation button. Each time you press the foot switch, the Variation number will increment. VARIATION DOWN Switches the Variation button. Each time you press the foot switch, the Variation number will decrement. VARIATION ALT Switches the Variation button. IFthe Variation [1] button or [3] button is selected, this will switch between the Variation [1] and [3] buttons. IFthe Variation [2] button or [4] button is selected, this will switch between the Variation [2] and [4] buttons. BREAK Stop the rhythm at the end of that measure.

Notes played on the Upper keyboard will be sustained only while you continue pressing the Foot Switch.

Notes played on the Lower keyboard will be sustained only while you continue pressing the Foot Switch. ART. CONTROL ART. CONTROL2 Applies an effect to an articulation voice [p. 61). OFF Turns the foot switch function off.

IE AT-900_e.book 135 X— 2007Æ9A7H &HA F8#439 Using the Performance Functions Using the Foot Switch to Switch Registrations You can use the Foot Switch as a dedicated switch for selecting Registrations in order. The registration will be switched each time you press the foot switch. The Regist Shift settings are stored to each individual Registration Set. When “RIGHT + Load Next” is assigned to the foot switch and the Load Next function is used to switch Registration Sets saved to a USB memory or floppy disk, set the Regist Shift setting to “RIGHT + Load Next” for all saved Registrations. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch <Controller>.

The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch <fS-<EZ- to display the Regist Shift.

4. Touch the Regist Shift setting (OFF/RIGHT/

LEFT/RIGHT + Load Next).

5. Touch < —}>< +)> to change the setting.

MED This seing remains stored in memory even while the power is turned off. Setting Descriptions OFF You can use a function assigned to the foot switch. The right foot switch is dedicated to RIGHT switching registrations. The function assigned to the right foot switch cannot be used. Setting Descriptions The left foot switch is dedicated to switching registrations. The function assigned to the left foot switch cannot be used. LEFT The right foot switch is dedicated to switching registrations. The function assigned to the right foot switch cannot be used. Selecting the Registration [12] button and pressing the right foot switch activates the Load Next function, calling up the next registration saved to the USB memory, user memory, or floppy disk. The Registration Load window appears in the display. When you then press the right foot switch again, the Registration Set is confirmed, and the Registration [1] button is selected. Example: 1-2-3...-+12 Load Next-> {Next Registration] 1 RIGHT + Load Next What is “Load Next”? You can use the Load Next function to call up Registrations in the order saved to the USB memory, user memory, or floppy disk. When you will be performing live, you can save registration sets to USB memory, user memory, or floppy disk in the order in which you will be performing. Then while you perform, you can recall the next registration set easily and smoothly. Checking the next registration set T. Display the Main screen (p. 31).

2. Touchthe ©. icon several times to switch

to ©. (Regis). The Main screen display will switch to the registration. Transpose REGIST-01 xD RE “Next” will indicate the name of the next registration set.

IE AT-900_e.book 136 X— 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#43 Using the Performance Functions You can use the expression pedal to adjust the overall volume. When you depress the Expression Pedal, the volume increases. The volume decreases as you tilt the pedal back. Decrease the volume the volume

Using the expression pedal enables you to give your performances even richer musical expressiveness. The expression pedal features the following special characteristics: + Completely releasing the expression pedal does not lower the volume to zero. lf you do want to turn down the volume completely, set the [Master Volume] slider to the Min (Minimum) position. + Even as you release your foot from the expression pedal and lower the volume, the lower-range portion will linger on. This provides a natural- sounding resonance. + When an Active Expression voice is selected, the expression pedal can be used to produce changes in the voice [p. 69).

Adjusting the Overall Volume Using an Expression Pedal You can specify how the Expression Pedal will affect the sound when it is pressed [p. 137) You can also specify whether the Expression Pedal will or will not control the volume during the recording of your performance (p. 211] You can specify whether the Expression Pedal will or will not control the volume during the playback of recorded performance (p. 212] NEMP You can connect a pedal keyboard (PK series; sold separately) to the AT-900C and use the pedal keyboard's expression pedal.

PS) & IE AT-900_e.book 137 X— 2007#9A7H &HA F8#43 & ||@ Using the Performance Functions Adjusting the Depth of the Expression Pedal Rhythm, 1 Auto You can set the amount of effect applied when you step on the Accompaniment expression pedal. M T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. Y PP Keyboard Part

2. Touch <Controller>. 2

The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch <ES-<ŒB- to display the Exp. Curve

(Expression Curve). P 7 Rhythm, Auto Accompaniment, Keyboard Part

4. Touch <Exp. Curve> setting.

Rhythm, Auto Accompaniment, Keyboard Part

Accompaniment Es a == 3 Setting Descriptions à The position of the expression pedal does not ô really affect the rhyihm performances and Keyboard Part 8 1 | Automatic Accompaniment. a This seing is convenient when you do not ê want to have the rhythm or Automatic . ë Accompaniment volume change much. 6. Touch <Exit-. The expression pedal is applied to the This setting remains stored in memory even while power is rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment just turned off. as it is to the keyboard performance. 2 The volume is easily adjusted according to the angle of the expression pedal, making this setting perfect for use in songs with big changes in dynamics. The expression pedal is applied to the rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment just as it is to the keyboard performance. 3 | The expression affect is applied more gently than with Setting 2, so this setting is appropriate for quieter songs with less intense dynamic changes. The expression pedal does not affect the rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment at all. 4 | This setting is suitable for ensemble performances and other performances featuring multiple instruments.

| & AT-900_e.book 138 X— 2007#9A7H &HA F8#434 ll Applying Various Effects to the Sound

The ATELIER allows you to apply various effects to the sounds you play from the keyboard. Harmony appropriate for the chord you play in the lower keyboard can be added to the highest note played in the upper keyboard. This function is called “Harmony Intelligence.” When you press the [Harmony Intelligence] button, the voice most suitable for the selected harmony intelligence will be selected automatically. Harmony Intelligence

Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button (indicator lights). Each time you press the button, the indicator will alternate between ON {lit} and OFF. The name of the selected Harmony Intelligence will be displayed for several seconds in the screen. P1/5

BIG BAND TRADITIONAL*

STRINGS HARP er” | armony to a Melody (Harmony Intelligence)

Applying Various Effects to the Sound Changing the Harmony Intelligence Type

There are 36 different Harmony types. The manner in which notes will sound also depends on the Harmony type. When you press the [Harmony Intelligence] button to turn it on {lit}, a voice most suitable for the selected harmony intelligence will be selected automatically. Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button. The Harmony Intelligence screen appears for several seconds. cn) | Touch <| | screen to select the desired harmony intelligence. The indicator of the Harmony Intelligence [Harmony Intelligence] button will blink. Type of Harmony Intelligence ORGAN, BIG BAND, STRINGS, BLOCK, HYMN, TRADITIONAL", HARP, DUET, COMBO, JAZZ SCAT, COUNTRY, BROADWAY, BRASS, FLUTE, DIXIELAND, HYMNP2, GOSPEL, SYNTH, OCTAVE 1", OCTAVE 2°, 1 NOTE”, 2 NOTES", 3 NOTES", 4 NOTES", ORGAN’, BIG BAND”, STRINGS”, BLOCK*, HYMN*, DUET/DIXIE*, COMBO/BRASS"*, JAZZ SCAT*, COUNTRY/SYN",

BROADWAY", FLUTE*, GOSPEL*

Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button once again. The [Harmony Intelligence] button indicator will light, indicating that the selected harmony intelligence has been confirmed.

You can also confirm the Harmony Intelligence settings by touching <Exit> on the Harmony Intelligence screen. You can also play the upper manual to confirm the type of the Harmony Intelligence.

CIE AT-900_e.book 140 K— 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#43 Applying Various Effects to the Sound The Way in which the keys you press are sounded by each type of harmony intelligence is described below. Type Solo Voice Upper Voice el on ORGAN — Theater Or.3 3 BIG BAND Trumpet Flugel Horn 5 STRINGS Shings 1 Strings 5 4 BLOCK Vibraphone Piano 1 5 HYMN Choir Choir 4 TRADITIONAL* Currently Selected Tone 3 HARP = Harp 2 DUET Trumpet Tp. Section 2 COMBO Clarinet Trombone 3 JAZZ SCAT Jazz Scat Jazz Scat 4 COUNTRY Full Organl Jazz Guitar 3 NEMD Harp-ype harmony intelligence BROADWAY Celesta Theater Or.1 3 does not sound 1he keys you BRASS Brass 1 Fr.HornSect3 3 play. Use your left hand to play FLUTE Flute 3 Strings 7 4 sara Marne DIXIELAND Trumpet Clarinet 2 a glissando in the upper & HYMN2 Female 1 Classical 4 keyboard, and a beautiful harp GOSPEL Full Organl Gospel 3 glissando wil be produced SYNTH Organ Bell Synth. Pad2 3 OCTAVE 1* Currently Selected Tone 2 OCTAVE 2* Currently Selected Tone 2 1 NOTE* Currently Selected Tone 2 2 NOTES* Currently Selected Tone 3 3 NOTES* Currently Selected Tone 4 A NOTES* Currently Selected Tone 5 ORGAN* Currently Selected Tone 3 BIG BAND* Currently Selected Tone 5 STRINGS* Currently Selected Tone 4 BLOCK* Currently Selected Tone 5 HYMN* Currently Selected Tone 4 DUET/DIXIE* Currently Selected Tone 2 COMBO/BRASS* Currently Selected Tone 3 The number of notes of the JAZZ SCAT* Currently Selected Tone 4 harmony will depend on the COUNTRY/SYN* Currenily Selected Tone 3 Harmony Iteligence type. BROADWAY" Currently Selected Tone 3 FLUTE* Currently Selected Tone 4 GOSPEL* Currently Selected Tone 3 | 140

Applying Various Effects to the Sound Adding Modulation to the Sound (Rotary Effect) Rotary is an effect which simulates the sound of rotating speakers. There is a choice of two settings: Fast and Slow. For more on the tones to which the Rotary effect can be applied, refer to “Voice List” CS (Appendix: separate booklet) Onlof

Fast/ Slow Rotal Soul nd 1: Select the voice to which you wish to apply the Rotary effect.

2. Press the Rotary Sound [On/Off] button {confirm that its

SP indicator is lit]. The Rotary effect will be applied to the voice.

3. Press the Rotary Sound [Fast/Slow] button to switch

between Rotary Fast {Lit} and Rotary Slow ([Unlit}. à her où can assign the Rotary Rotary [Fast/Slow] button Effect Sound [Fast/Slow] nn function to the foot switches : The effect obtained is equivalent to speakers being located on each side of the Lit (Fast) . : rapidly rotated. Expression Pedal (p. 134]. Unilit (Slow) Effect simulating the slow rotation of speakers.

When you switch the rotary effect from “Fast” to “Slow,” the modulation will slow down gradually, and when you switch from “Slow” to “Fast” the modulation will speed up gradually. | 141

Making Fine Adjustments to the Rotary Effect Speed [Rotary Speed) You can make fine adjustments to the speaker rotation speed of the rotary effect {p. 141). T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. Transpose [0 C 9°) Biggest Band 1 Orgent eu Strings D 5 io Gand Piano Mruts D Lover Organt Morch tr Ens [ orch C SpitPoint ]

The Effect screen appears.

4. Touch the value setting buttons for Rotary

Speed to adjust the setting.

NE These settings remain stored in memory even while the power is off. > —

Applying Various Effects to the Sound Changing the Brighiness of the Rotary Effect (Rotary Color) This setting allows you to choose the brighiness of the Rotary sound obtained when using the Rotary effect {p. 141). T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. Fu Orgent MFut Strngs D 3 Die Grand Piero Mrures D Loner Organt Morcnstrens —_ÎR ou — Den [Organ Bassi Dites Pdl + t ))

The Effect screen appears.

3. Touch <ES-<Œ3- to display the Rotary Color.

4. Touch the value setting buttons for Rotary

Color to adjust the setting. Each time you touch the Rotary Color setting, it will switch between "BRIGHT” and “MELLOW." Setting BRIGHT, MELLOW

These settings remain stored in memory even while the MERD power is of.

Applying Various Effects to the Sound Adding Richness to the Sound (Chorus Effect) Chorus is an effect that adds expansiveness to a sound, making one instrument sound like several. For some of the voices, Chorus You can apply a chorus effect for the “Upper Symphonic," “Upper may head be turned ON, Orchestral,” “Lower Symphonic,” and “Lower Orchestral” voices. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. Transpose

Menu Description Upper To apply chorus to the Upper part Lower To apply chorus to the Lower part

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

3. For the part to which you wish to apply the chorus effect,

touch the Chorus “ON/OFF” display to change the setting. Some voices do not allow the Chorus effect to be applied. For Each time you touch the Chorus setting, it will alternate ON/OFF. details refer to “Voice List” (lAppendix: separate booklet]. Uppi DB FUI Organt You can open he Pedal Keyboard screen, Lower Keyboard screen or Upper Keyboard screen with touching <Pedal>, <lower>, and <Upper. Indication Description ON The Chorus effect will be applied to he voice. OFF The Chorus effect will not be applied to the voice.

Applying Various Effects to the Sound 0 LUE Adding Resonance to the Sound (Sustain Effect) Sustain allows you to add a sustain effect or decay to each voice after the keys are released. The Sustain effect wil not be The Sustain effect can be added to the Upper [except the Solo part}, Lower, applied to the Solo part voice. and Pedal voices. When Applying Sustain to the Pedal Part The length of Sustain can be modified independenily for each part (p. 148]. Settings

1. Press the [Pedal Sustain] button to make the indicator light.

The Sustain effect is applied to the voices of the Pedal Bass part. & When Applying Sustain to the Upper Part and Lower ss

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

Touch either <Upper> or <Lower>. Indication Description Upper To apply sustain to the Upper part Lower To apply sustain to the Lower part Touch < Touch the Sustain setting to switch between “ON and "OFF." Each time you touch the Sustain setting, it will alternate ON/OFF.

Full Touch <Exit>. You can touch <Pedal> to access the Pedalboard screen and change the sustain settings for the pedal part.

Changing the Sustain Length Lenghh. The sustain length can be set independently (SHORT, MIDDLE {Medium} or LONG) for the Upper and Lower keyboards and Pedalboard. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. You can open the Pedalboard screen, Lower Keyboard screen, or Upper Keyboard screen with touching <Pedal>, <lower>, and <Upper>. The Sourd/Kojbood are oppac. 4. For he part whose sustain lenglh you wish o adjust, touch the Sustain “SHORT/MIDDLE/ LONG” display. Orch Organ Bassi Disc Pdi

2. Touch either <Upper>, <Lower>, or <Pedal>.

Menu Part whose DE length you wish to 5. Touch < —}>< +}> to change the value. change Upper To change the lengih of the Upper par. Setting Lower To change the length of the Lower part. SHORT, MIDDLE, LONG Pedal To change the length of the Pedal part. 3 3 P 6. Touch <Exit>.

Applying Various Effects to the Sound Reverb is an effect that adds a sense of spaciousness to the sound, creating the illusion of playing in a large or small concert hall, a large or small room, a small club, etc. Accomp/ — Pedal SMF Rhythm Organ Orch JC) CTE]

JELJ]C]0C) T. Press the Reverb [A] or [W] buttons to adjust the overall @ Reverb amount. When you press the up button [A], additional Reverb is applied. Pressing the down button [W] decreases the Reverb level. If none of the Reverb indicators are lit, the Reverb effect will not be heard.

When you press the Reverb [A] [W] buttons, the Part Balance Monitor screen appears. In the Part Balance Monitor screen you can check the reverb depth. The Part Balance Monitor screen is displayed for several seconds and then closes Part Balance Monitor automatically. IF you touch <Hold>, the screen continues to be displayed until you touch <Exit> again.

ae) Changing the Reverb Type By changing the reverberations of the notes, you can enjoy the atmosphere of performance in a wide variety of different locations. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. Transpose

The Effect screen appears.

4. Touch the value setting buttons for Reverb

Type to adjust the setting. The following screen appears.

5. Touch < —}>< +)> to change the setting.

Display Description ROOM 1 Simulates the reverb of a conference room ROOM 2 Simulates the reverb of a performance lounge ROOM 3 Simulates the reverb of a large, open room HAL 1 Simulates the reverb of a large concert hall HALL 2 Simulates the reverb of a small concert hall SMALL : CHURCH The reverberation of a small church LARGE : CHUREH The reverberation of a large church CATHEDRAL The reverberation of a cathedral PLATE Applies a bright, metallic reverb DEL An echolike sound repeaied several times Similarly to the above but where the PAN DELAY sound is panned between the left and right speakers lt is not possible to modify the delay time (delay interval) when “DELAY" or “PAN DELAY” is selected.

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

to adjust the setting. By changing the type of reverb [p. 150] you can experience The following screen appears. the feeling of performing in various different locations, and by Changing the Wall Type changing the Wall Type (wall material) you can make further adjustments to the way in which reverberation occurs. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. Transpose

5. Touch < —}>< +)> to change the setting.

Display Description DRAPERY Pleated curtain CARPET Carpet ACOUSTICTILE | Acoustical tile, sound-absorptive tile WOOD Wood BRICK Brick En | PLASTER Plaster CONCRETE F Concrete block BLOCK ” ; - MARBLE Marble

2. Touch <Effect>. 6. Touch <Exit>.

The Effect screen appears.

Applying Various Effects to the Sound

Changing the Depth of the Reverb You can specify the reverb depth for each part. To adjust the reverb depth for Upper/ Lower/Pedal/Solo T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

The Upper Keyboard screen, Lower Keyboard screen, or Pedalboard screen will be displayed. | Rec/Play

4. Touch the part whose reverb depth you wish

to adjust. The following screen appears. SoundKBD) 4: Roc/Play

Applying Various Effects to the Sound To adjust the reverb depth for something other than Upper/Lower/ Pedal/Solo The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. É LB: e u M Fu Organt Mu Strings M . Solo Sound/KE Grand Piano _ rues D tes Lover Organt Morch tr Ens < Roc/Play

The Effect screen appears.

Part Accomp, Rhythm, Drums, M.Perc, A.Bass, Vintage Organ Touch the part whose reverb depth you wish to adjust. The following screen appears.

5. Touch < —}>< +}> to adjust the setting.

Setting 0-10, AUTO (Accomp, Rhythm, A.Bass only) For the three Parts of the Accomp, Rhythm and Accompaniment Bass, you have the option of selecting the “AUTO” setting. Parts for which “AUTO” is selected Will be set to the Reverb Depth that is most suitable for the Rhythm currently selected.

i ; Es | III | Applying Various Effects to the Sound nn = LI Using the D Beam Controller for Additional Enjoyment Modifying the Sound You can modify the sound simply by moving your hand above the D Beam controller located on the panel. # D Beam Pitch Filter Volume 1: Press either the [Pitch], [Filter], or [Volume] button for the D Beam so the button is lit in red. Button Button status Description u When the [Pitch], [Filter], or Pitch Lit (red) Changes the pitch of the sounds you play on [Volume] button for the D Beam & the keyboard. is li in green, the sound effect & Changes ihe lonal character ofihe sounds assigned to he D Beam j En ü ed you pley on he keyboard. conter vil play when you ier it fre * For some sounds, he tonal change may be move your hand above the D difficult to notice. Beam controller [p. 155]. Volume Li led) Changes ihe volume of 1he sounds you play u ' on the keyboard.

2. Move your hand above the D Beam controller.

The effect assigned to the D Beam controller will be applied to the sound. Effective range of the D Beam controller The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will vary according to the brighiness of its surroundings. If it does not The illustration at right shows the effective range of the D Beam controller. Moving your hand outside this range will not produce any effect. The effective range of the D Beam controller will be drastically decreased under strong direct sunlight. Please operate as you expect, you can readjust the sensitivity. Increasing the D Beam sensitivity value (p. 213) will outdoors. make it more sensitive. be aware of this when using the D Beam controller Turning the D Beam Controller Off

3. Press the button you pressed in step 1 several times so its

light is turned off.

Applying Various Effects to the Sound Moving Your Hand Above the D Beam Controller to Produce a Sound Effect You can produce various sound effects simply by moving your hand above the D Beam controller on the panel. f D Beam Pitch Filter Volume

T. Press either the [Pitch], [Filter], or [Volume] button for the D Beam so the button is lit in green. Button Button status Description Pitch Lit (green) A bass drum and cymbal will sound. The cymbal will be struck with gradually Filter Lit (green) : : increasing force. Volume Lit (green) The sound of a wind chime is produced.

2. Move your hand above the D Beam controller.

The sound effect assigned to the D Beam controller will play. Turning the D Beam Controller Off

3. Press the button you pressed in step 1 several times so its

light is turned off. When the [Pitch], [Filter], or [Volume] button for the D Beam is lit in red, an effect will be applied to the sound when you move your hand above the D Beam controller {p. 154).

Making Effective Use of the Lower Keyboard Since the lower keyboard of the ATELIER provides a generous 76 notes, you can use it to play piano pieces with ease. In addition, you can divide the keyboard into two or more sections and play solo voices, play the pedal bass voice, or combine a variety of uses for even more versatility. For example, the following applications are possible. the Lower Keyboard to Play the Solo Voice + Press the Solo [To Lower] button in the Solo section to Play the Solo voice to the Lower keyboard [p. 158]. 1 Drums/SFX E Manual Perc. Bass A Lower Solo

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play Drum Sounds or Sound Effects

+ Press the [Manual Perc] button to play drum sounds or sound effects with the Lower voice on

Playing Drum Sounds from the Entire Lower Keyboard + Press the [Drums/SFX] button (p. 76]. & Drums/SFX LR # Manual Perc. Bass A Lower E Solo

IE AT-900_e.book 157 X— 2007#9A7H &HA F8#H43 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Part by Hand

+ Press the [Bass Split] button in the Pedal section to play the Pedal Bass voice from the Lower keyboard [p. 161). & Drums/SFX 1 Manual Perc. Bass A Lower LE Solo

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play Drum Sounds and Solo Voice + Press the [Drums/SFX] button (p. 76), and then press the Solo [To Lower] button (p. 158] E Drums/SFX L Manual Perc. Bass ELower E Solo By changing the combination of voices that are played on the Lower keyboard, and by changing the Solo Split Point (p. 160) and Bass Split Point {p. 162), you can create the following types of setup. LULU # Drums/SFX E Manual Perc. n Bass A Lower E Solo E Drums/SFX E Manual Perc. L Bass ELower LE Solo E Drums/SFX E Manual Perc. n Bass E Lower E Solo

Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively

Normally, the solo voice will sound on the upper keyboard. By using the Solo [To Lower] button, you can play the solo voice in the right- hand side of the lower keyboard that includes the B4 key. The state in which the keyboard is divided in this way is called “split,” and the location at which the keyboard is divided to play the solo voice in the lower keyboard is called the “Solo Split Point.” Solo Select a Solo voice (p. 51). Press the Solo [To Lower] button (indicator lights). When you play the Lower keyboard, the Solo voice will sound in the range to the right of the Solo Split Point. Solo voice

Solo Split Point Lower keyboard To turn off the Solo split, press the Solo [To Lower] button {indicator turns off). The Solo voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard; the Solo voice will now be played in the Upper keyboard. You can adhust the Solo Split Point [p. 160). You can change how the Solo voice will sound (p. 159). IFthe Solo [To Lower] is ON, the Solo voice will not be heard from the upper keyboard. The key used for the solo split point is included in the Solo voice range. You can layer the Solo voice with the Lower voice so that they will sound together [p. 159)

Changing How the Solo Voice Responds Layering the Solo Voice and Lower Voice When the Solo voice is assigned to the Upper keyboard or the When the Solo voice is being played by the Lower keyboard Lower keyboard, you can specify how the Solo voice will (ie., when the Solo [To Lower] button is ON), you can specify respond when more than one key is pressed. whether the Lower voice and the Solo voice will sound . together (layered), or will sound separately (split). T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. 8 llayered) parately (spl The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. T Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

The Upper Keyboard screen appears. 2. Touch <Upper>. The Upper Keyboard screen appears.

4. Touch the Solo To Lower Mode setting to

switch between “SPLIT” and “LAYER.” Each time you touch the Solo To Lower Mode setting, it Will alternate between “SPLIT” and “LAYER." Setting Descriptions SPLIT The parts will sound separately. LAYER The Lower voice and Solo voice will sound together.

Setting Descriptions The Solo voice will sound the highest TOP NOTE | he ihat is played for the Solo part. The Solo voice will sound the note LAST NOTE that was most recently played for the Solo part. The Solo voice will sound all notes POLYPHONIC | io are played for ihe Solo part.

Changing the Solo Split Point This setting is used to determine the Solo Split Point (lower limit of the playable range of the Solo voice] on the Lower keyboard to any desired position. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. Transpose [Es C M Biggest Band The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. ñ = M Fu Organt Mu Strings M : Solo F] Sound/KBD| Grand Piano Mrlutes Lomer orgent Morenstrens |A

2. Touch <Split Point>.

The Split Point screen appears.

[ You can also set the split point by pressing the key of NEMD the lower keyboard that you want to be the Solo Split Point. Point

T. While touching the Solo Split Point value press the key in the Lower keyboard that The Solo Split Point will be set in the Split Point screen.

(E1-G7 indication) in the Split Point screen, you want to specify as the Solo Split Point.

By using the [Bass Split] button you can play the bass voice in the left-hand side (including C3) of the lower keyboard. The location at which the lower keyboard is divided in this way, to play the pedal bass voice, is called the “Bass Split Point.” Orchestral Select a Pedal Bass voice (p. 50). Press the [Bass Split] button (indicator lights). When you play the Lower keyboard, the Pedal Bass voice will sound in the range to the left of [and including] the C3 note. Pedal Bass voice Le —— — |

Bass Split Point Lower keyboard To turn off the Bass split, press the [Bass Split] button {indicator turns off). The Pedal Bass voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard; the Pedal Bass voice will now be played in the pedalboard. It is not possible to select and play both [Bass Split] and Pedal [To Lower] buttons simultaneously. You can adjust the Bass Split Point (p. 162). The bass split point is included in the lefthand area of the keyboard IFthe [Bass Split] is ON, the Pedal Bass voice will not be heard from the Pedalboard. The Pedal Bass voice will sound from the Lower keyboard.

Changing the Bass Split Point You can assign the Bass Split Point {the highest key up to which the Pedal Bass voice will sound), to any key of the Lower keyboard. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. Transpose [Es C M Biggest Band The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. z A M Full Organ1 LC Full Strings L Solo D''ÉERRS Grand Piano Flute3 Loner organt Moronstrens

2. Touch <Split Point>.

The Split Point screen appears.

fr You can also set the bass split point by playing the MED esred key of the lower keyboard.

T. While touching the Bass Split Point value (E1-G7 indication) in the Split Point screen, press the key in the Lower keyboard that you want to specify as the Bass Split Point. The bass split point will be set in the Split Point screen. KL J

By using the Pedal [To Lower] button, you can sound the Pedal Bass voice by playing the root note [see p. 279) of a chord on the Lower keyboard in the area that is playing the Lower voice. Orchestral Select a Pedal Bass voice (p. 50). Press the Pedal [To Lower] button (indicator lights). When you play a chord in the area of the Lower keyboard that sounds the Lower voice, the Pedal Bass voice will also be heard and will play the root note. IFthe “Leading Bass” function is on (p. 92), the lowest note played in the lower keyboard will sound the pedal bass voice. Press the Pedal [To Lower] button (indicator turns off). The Pedal Bass voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard. IF no portion of the Lower keyboard is sounding the Lower voice (the [Drums/SFX] button is ON), the Pedal Bass voice will not sound. It is not possible to select and play both [Bass Split] and Pedal [To Lower] buttons simultaneously. IFthe Pedal [To Lower] is ON, the Pedal Bass voice will not be heard from the Pedalboard.

The internal composer can record performances and play Touching <Rec/Play> in the Main Screen to back commercial SMF music files. Open the Rec/Play Screen and Using the Rec/ The composer can be used in the following hvo ways. Play Screen’s Composer Buttons Using the Panel Composer Buttons Composer Song Registration GGB2 0 Reset Play/Stop Rec (æ) m >1# e Button Description Button Description Track Buttons for tracks to which performances Reset Returns you to the beginning of the song. Rhythm are recorded light up. Accmp Alighted button can be toggled between Starts and stops playback of the song. Bass lighted and unlit by pressing it. Tracks Lower are muted when the button's light is off. After the [Rec] button has been pressed, Upper Play/Stop putting the composer in record standby por —+ For more about the track buttons, refer mode, recording then starts when the Control top. 165. [Play/Stop] is pressed. & Reset Ret to the beginning of th . 7 @} The unit switches to record standby mode. SIP YO 10 ME PEGPNMNG 97 ME s0ng @ Rec *_In record standby, the [Rec] button is Stop Sitops playback of the song. lit, and the [Play/Stop] button flashes. Stan playback of the song. The Song Select screen appears in the Song displa After <Rec> has been touched to put the pay: Play composer in record standby mode, Registration The Registration Load screen appears in recording then starts when you touch the display. <Playz. Demo The Demo screen opens. The unit switches to record standby R mode. ec *_In record standby, <Rec> is lit, and <Play> flashes. Bwd Rewindk the song. Fwd Fast forwards the song. You can toggle between display of the track buttons, the bouncing ball, or the track mute buttons by touching the button. Bed The Notation screen appears in the display. O The Utility screen for the Composer is displayed.

Recording/Playing Back What You Play . Track Recorded performance What is a Track Button? Solo Mode The recorded performance will be automatically assigned to the SbToL Nod seven Track buttons according to the recorded part. You can 99/0 0wer Vos record or play back independently by specifying the desired Solo Split Point Track button; for example, when you wish to re-record a track. [Bass Split] button (ON/OFF) Bass Split Point Sustain ON/OFF Sustain Length Initial Touch Vintage Organ Seting Wall Type The Voices assigned for each part Level [A][Y] (Part Balance Volume] You can record different kinds of performance data into each rack: The Reverb depth for each part The Chorus settings (ON/OFF] of the voice Track Recorded performance = The Octave settings for each part Rhythm performance Control Rhythm Drums/SFX Manual percussion Accmp Automatic Accompaniment [except Bass) Bass Pedal Bass Voice Performance Data [Note, Bender, Modulation] Bass part of the Automatic Accompaniment Lower Lower Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold, Bender, Modulation] Upper Upper Voice Performance Daïa (Note, Hold, Bender, Modulation, After Touch] Solo Solo Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold, Bender, Modulation, After Touch] Control Glide Expression Reverb Type Reverb Depth [Drums/SFX] button (ON/OFF) Drums/SFX Set [Manual Percussion] button (ON/OFF) Manual Percussion Set Chord Intelligence Chord Hold Leading Bass Lower Voice [Hold] button (ON/OFF] Tempo setting Volume of the rhythm Accompaniment part Reverb depth of the rhythm Accompaniment part Volume of the rhythm drum part Reverb depth of the rhythm drum part Volume of the rhythm bass part Reverb depth of the rhythm bass part Solo [To Lower] button (ON/OFF] Pedal [To Lower] button (ON/OFF] More information about the track assignments when playing commercial SMF music files, please refer to Transpose [: [+] button setting MEMD _ “Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track Mute [Harmony Intelligence] button] (ON/OFF] Harmony Intelligence Type Rotary [Fast/Slow] button (ON/OFF) Rotary [On/Of] button (ON/OFF) Pedal Bass Mode Butions When Playing Back Commercial SMF Music Files” (P. 169).

ae) During recording, the control track will store the operations as follows. + Recording panel operations [Voice selections, Tempo changes, etc.) Newly recorded performance data will be added without erasing the previously recorded data. + Recording expression pedal operations This will depend on the function of the expression pedal. Recording of expression operations will differ depending on the setting for “Exp. Src (Rec].” For details refer to “Changing the Function of the Expression Pedal” {p. 211). IF you wish to erase all the recorded data and record new performance data, use the editing function "Erase” (erase performance data) to erase the data (p. 178]. Displaying the Track Buttons The track buttons will be displayed in the screen when you record or play back a performance. T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears. The following buttons are referred to as the track buttons. All accompaniment data is grouped to the “Acemp” track button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the MED rhythm performance data is grouped to “Rhythm.” IF you want to mute only a portion of the rhythms or accompaniment, open up the Track Mute screen, and switch off the Track Mute buttons there {p. 170).

Recording/Playing Back What You Play . 2. Press the [Song] button. Playing Back Performance Composer Songs Stored on USB Memory mu ko Song Vegistration and SMF Music Files Se © In addition to playing back the music you recorded on the instrument and saved to a USB memory, ATELIER also lets you Reset Play/Stop Rec enjoy a wide variety of commercially available song files, mr" such as defined below. 4 >Iu e The Song Select screen appears. SMF Music Files SMF (Standard MIDI File) is a data format that was created in order to standardize music data formats between manufacturers. Collections of songs in SMF music data are commercially available in a wide range of |_O2:April in Par | styles for enjoyment, as accompaniment for practicing |_CäBevond the S | musical instruments, and for karaoke. 04:Cabaret I you want to purchase SMF music data, you can contact the dealer where you purchased the ATELIER. ® ToplaybakonYone song 3. Touch<-}>< +)» to selectihe desired medio ® I you want to play a song from USB memory, choose T. Prepare the song that you want to play back. “Ext Memory.” If you want to play a song from floppy IF you want to play a song from USB memory, connect it disk, choose “Disk.” to the external memory connector. If you want to play a song from floppy disk, connect the 4. In the screen, touch <ÆS><ŒZ> to select the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert a song that you wish to play back. floppy disk into the drive.

5. Touch <@MED- (p-) to play back the

When the performance song loaded from a USB song. memory is a Standard MIDI File, “EI” will be displayed on the Main screen. 6. Touch <@ED- pi 10 stop ihe song. 3 Transpose PL You can also play back or stop the music data by touching

IE AT-900_e.book 168 X— 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#434 Recording/Playing Back What You Play Playing back all performance data T Prepare the song that you want to play back. IF you want to play a song from USB memory, connect it to the external memory connector. I you want to play a song from floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert a floppy disk into the drive.

2. While holding down the [Song] button, press

the [Play/Stop] button. Composer Song \segistration [Demo E) © © All performance data saved on the USB memory or floppy disk will be played consecutively.

3. To stop playback, press the [Play/Stop]

Rese/ Play/Stop \ Rec

Silencing a Specific Track (Track Mute] When the Rec/Play screen is displayed, the track button will light to indicate a track in which a performance has been recorded. By turning off these track buttons, you can temporarily silence the sound. This is referred to as “Track Mute.” If you want to play back a song from USB memory, connect your USB memory to the external memory connector before you continue. If you want to play back a song from floppy disk, connect your floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk. T Press the [Song] button. The Song Select screen appears. O2:ATELIER-02 O3:ATELIER-03 O4:ATELIER-04 OS:ATELIER-05

2. Touch < —|>< +}> to select the desired media.

Choose “Favorites” if you want to play back a song from user memory, choose “Ext Memory” if you want to play back a song from USB memory, or choose “Disk” if you want to play back a song from floppy disk.

4. Touch <Load> to load the song.

The Rec/Play screen appears. Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back Commercial SMF Music Files Recording/Playing Back What You Play

Track button Channel Rhythm 10 Accmp 5,6,7,8,9,11,12,18, 14,15, 16 Bass 2 Lower 3 Upper 4 All accompaniment data is grouped to the “Acemp” track Solo 1 button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the MED rhythm performance data is grouped to “Rhythm.” IF you want to mute only a portion of the rhythms or accompaniment, open up the Track Mute screen, and switch Correspondence Berween Track Buttons and of the Track Mute buttons there {p. 170]. Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back Performance Data Created with an Music se oc Le ATELIER

5. Press a track button that is lit, extinguishing

the button. Track button Track Mute button When you play back the performance, track buttons that are not lighted will be muted [slenced). Rhythm | 10: 11 (Drums/SFX, 13 [Manual Percussion] Accmp 5,6,7,8,9, 12, 14,15 D — Bass 2 (Bass) Lower 3 (Lower) Upper 4 (Upper) Solo 1 (Solo)

6. Press the track button once again (button

lights). The part that had been muted will return to normal and will be heard.

Muting Individual Tracks of Performance Data All accompaniment data is grouped to the “Accmp" track button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the rhythm performance data is grouped to “Rhythm.” You can mute only a portion of the rhythms or accompaniment on the Track Mute screen. T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears. ATELIER-0

2. Touch < ES > à number of times.

The Track Mute screen appears. Sixteen Track Mute buttons appear in the display. From the left, these are “Track 1, Track 2 … Track 15, and Track 16.”

3. Touch the screen to select the track that you

wish to mute. The button you've touched goes out, indicating the sound is muted.

4. When you touch an unlit track button, the

track button lights up, indicating muting of the track is cancelled.

Track mute will be cancelled if you choose other performance data. The seven Track buttons in the Rec/Play screen {p. 165) correspond to the sixteen Track Mute buttons of the Track Mute screen as shown below. Commercial SMF Music Files Track Mute Button Track Button 1 (Solo) Solo 2 (Pedal) Pedal 3 (Lower) Lower 4 (Upper) Upper 5-9, 11-16 (Acmp) Accmp 10 (Rhythm) Rhythm Performance Data Created on the ATELIER Track Mute Button Track Button 1 (Solo) Solo 2 (Pedal) Pedal 3 (Lower) Lower 4 (Upper) Upper 5-9, 12, 14, 15 (Acmp] Accmp 10 (Rhythm) Rhythm 11 (Drums/SFX) Rhythm 13 (Manual Percussion] Rhythm *_ The Track Mute button 16 cannot be used with performance data created on an ATELIER.

À & IE AT-900_e.book 171 X— 2007#9A7H &HA F8#43 & Ï Recording/Playing Back What You Play playing Notations Viewing a Nota tn DCE oo. You can display the notations of performances from SMF 6+ Touch <Digiscore> on the Rec/Play screen. music files and recordings made on the ATELIER. This is very The Notation screen appears. convenient when you want to read the music as you play and to confirm recorded songs. n n 250 IE = Selecting Songs IE = Pr mn — There is no need to select the song when displaying ==: | notations for performances recorded with the Composer. ) Ê =, 7 Start from Step 6. . : Base |LonorLppo T. Prepare the USB memory or floppy disk that = contains the song for which you want to view the notation. Display Explanation IF you want to view the notation for a song in USB . memory, connect your USB memory to the external Enlarge the notation display. memory connector before you continue. IF you want to view the notation for a song in floppy Display lyrics in the notation. disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive k connector, and insert a floppy disk into the drive. Display the Bass part notation. L 7 NA

2. Press the [Song] button.

Display the Lower part notation. The Song Select screen appears. Display the Upper part notation. Display the Upper part and Lower part UBL : notations. You can change the part that is displayed, and change the way in which the notation O3:ATELIER-03 | OSATELIER-05 | is displayed {p. 172).

3. Touch < —|>< +}> to select the desired media.

I you want to view the notation for a song in USB memory, select “Ext Memory.” I you want to view the notation for a song in user memory, select “Favorites.” Reid noA jeu #oeg Bulfeld/Buipiooet IF you want to view the notation for a song in floppy disk, select "Disk."

4. Touch <D--U- to select the song whose

notation is to be displayed.

After the song is loaded, the Rec/Play screen opens.

4. Touch the button for the item whose setting

Changing the Notation Settings you want to change. T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main Screen. Menu Seking Bnereten The Rec/Play screen appears. OFF Not displayed Letter names [fixed do) are CD.E display in the detailed C1 Trak | ___] notation Pitches ° Solmization syllables | (movable do) are DORSM | played in the detailed notation. auto Disploy is svitched automatically. .. Displayed the G-clef staff

2. Touch <DigiScore>. Clef Upper | G Clef of the upper part.

The Notation screen appears. Displayed the F-clef staff F Clef of the upper part. AUTO Display is switched automatically. Displayed the G-clef staff of the lower part. D — Displayed the F-clef staff Clef Lower | G Clef FClef of he lower part. AUTO Key is switched automatically.

3. Touch <Option>. Db, Ab,

The Notation Options screen appears. Eb, Bb,F, C,G,D,A, Key E, B, F#, Bbm, Fm, Display the notation in the Cm, Gm, | selected key. Dm, Am, Em, Bm, F#m, C#m, G#m, Dm Select the part to be Upper Part | 1-16 displayed as the upper part. Select the part to be Lower Part | 1-16 displayed as the lower part. Select the part to be 2 F 1-16 displayed as the b /Play Bass Part i t ET _ ne See ess

= CLR S vi ES The Key screen is composed of io screens. Touch NEMD < © Main] > to switch between the two screens.

Some notes on a Notation screen + When you start playback of music files, the marks À appears. While this appears on the notation, the ATELIER is reading data. Please wait until reading of the data is complete. +_Inthe Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed. +_ The notations that are presented by the display are produced based on the music files. Viewing ease is given priority over precise expression when dealing with complex, highlevel music. Because of his, you may find that the notation shown in the display does not match what is provided on commercially available sheet music. The notation display feature is particularly unsuitable for the display of difficult, complex musical works that demand accurate notation. In addition, the display cannot show notes that are briefer than a sixteenth note. +_IFyou select a part that does not contain performance data, notes will not be displayed in the notation. Use <Option> to change the part that is displayed. +_IFyou use the buttons located below the display to change the displayed part while the song is playing, the song may be played back from the beginning.

IE AT-900_e.book 174 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#434 Recording/Playing Back What You Play an) FL CELUI © NULL | ELU nl AA tTE Recording a Performance You can record the performance that you play. You can also record your performance while playing rhythms or automatic accompaniment. Composer Song _ Registration

1. Select the panel settings needed for recording

2. Enter the recording standby mode by pressing

the [Rec] button. The [Rec] button indicator will light, and the [Play/Stop] button will blink.

3. Press the [Play/Stop] button to start recording.

When you press the [Play/Stop] button, the metronome will play wo measures (bars of countin before recording begins. IF you wish to use Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment as you record, press the [Start/Stop] button instead of the MEMD [Play/Stop] button to begin recording. Also, if the [Sync Stari] button is lit (i.e., if Sync Start is ON), recording will begin the instant you play the Lower keyboard.

4. Press the [Play/Stop] button when you have

completed your recording. The Track indicator where a performance song is recorded will change from a flashing to a constant light. When you press the [Ending] button [or [Start/Stop] button) while recording a Rhythm performance or Automatic Accompaniment, the Rhythm performance and Automatic Accompaniment will stop. However, the recording itself will continue. Press the [Play/Stop] button to stop recording. The Play and Stop functions can both be assigned to one of MEMp the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 134). You can also choose to cancel the metronome countin MEMD before recording starts [p. 219]

Caution If you press the [Rec] button when a song has been selected from the USB memory or floppy disk, the selected song will be completely loaded into the ATELIER and the Composer will enter into the recording standby mode. To record a new song, use the following procedure. T Press the [Rec] button to cancel recording standby.

2. Disconnect the external media.

If you've connected USB memory, disconnect the USB memory from the external memory connector. If you're using a floppy disk, remove the floppy disk from the disk drive.

3. Delete the performance data (p. 178].

Re-record your performance. Composer Song Registration

Reset Play/Sto/ Rec oi El CL] QU If the following screen appears AÀ\ Wenory Ful When recording was automatically canceled because the memory limit was reached.

IE AT-900_e.book 175 K— 2007Æ9A7H &HA F8#434 Recording/Playing Back What You Play Playing Back a Performance Song Here’s how to play back a performance you've recorded. Composer Song Registration

Rese/ Play/Stop \ Rec LRec/Play Touch <Resets. The location at which playback will start will return to the beginning of measure 1. If you wish to begin playback from the middle of the song, touch <Bwd> <Fwd> to move to the measure from which you wish to begin playback. Touch <Play> to begin playback. After playback reaches the end of the performance, it Will stop automatically. MES You can also begin playback by pressing the Composer [Play/Stop] button.

4. To stop playback at any point, touch the

<Stop> button. MESp You can also stop playback by pressing the Composer [Play/Stop] button. The Play and Stop functions can both be assigned to one of the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 134). MESp You can specify whether or not the Expression Pedal will affect the playback and what you play while ATELIER music NEMP file is being played back (p. 212]. If you load performance data (such as SMF music files) that was not designed for an ATELIER Series instrument and play it back, you may find, when playing rhythms and automatic accompaniment, that the music doesn't sound quite like it should. (For example, the wrong sounds could be played). If you want the data to be played back accurately, first press the [Reset] button prior to playback. Add the T: a Count Sound to Match ing (Count In} In cases such as when you want to perform in time with a song, you can have a count sound played before playback of the song begins, allowing you to synchronize your own performance with the song. Playing back a song after playing the count sound is called “Count In.” T: Hold down the [Reset] button and press the [Play/Stop] button. The metronome will play two measures [bars) of countin before recording begins.

Recording Each Part Separately In this method, each part [track button] is recorded one after another: first the Rhythm part, then the bass part, etc. IFthere are any previously recorded performances, you can listen to them as you record additional parts.

1. Select the panel settings needed for recording

The Rec/Play screen appears.

3. Touch the <Bwd> and <Fwd> buttons to select

the desired measure (bar) when you start recording. I you wish to start recording from the beginning of the song, touch the <Reset> button.

4. in the Rec/Play screen, touch <Rec> to enter

recording-standby mode. <Play> and the unrecorded track buttons in the screen Will blink. The track buttons that are already recorded will light. blink Also, the panel Composer [Rec] button indicator will light, and [Play/Stop] button will blink. You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the NEMp Composer [Rec] button.

recording. When you touch <Play> in the Rec/Play screen, the metronome will sound a two-measure count, and then recording will begin. As you listen to the performance song previously recorded, record the Part into a new Track. You can also start recording by pressing the Composer NEMD [Play/Stop] button.

6. In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Stop> to stop

recording. The track button for which performance data has been recorded will be lit. You can also stop recording by pressing the Composer NEMD [Play/Stop] button.

7. Repeat steps 3-6 to record each part.

Recording/Playing Back What You Play Re-Recording If you made a mistake in your performance during recording etc., you can re-record just a portion of the musical data in the track. IF you wish to re-record with different settings for voices, tempo, part balance, erase the recorded song (p. 178) and rerecord again. IF the Control track still contains data from before you rerecorded, the volume or sounds may change during playback. T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch the <Bwd> and <Fwd> buttons to select

the desired measure (bar) when you start recording. I you wish to start recording from the beginning of the song, touch the <Reset> button.

3. In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Rec> to enter

recording-standby mode. <Play> and the unrecorded track buttons in the screen Will blink. The button indicators of tracks that are already recorded will light. LC Rec/Play rem] Also, the panel [Rec] button indicator will light, and [Play/Stop] button will blink. You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the [Rec] button. MERD

4. Touch the Track button which you wish to re-

recording (button flashes). The song data of the specified Track [with the exception ofthe Control Track] will be erased as new song data is recorded. When the Track button is lit constanily, no song data has been recorded on that Track.

5. In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Play> to begin

recording. The metronome will sound a tWo-measure count, and then recording will begin. You can also start recording by pressing the [Play/Stop] button.

6. In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Stop> to stop

recording. The track buttons which were re-recorded will change from flashing to being constantly lit. NEMP You can also stop recording by pressing the [Play/Stop] button. IF you wish to keep the existing Expression Pedal data, and record only the panel operations, you can make settings to prevent the operation of the Expression Pedal from being recorded [p. 211). You can use punchn recording [p. 185) to re-record only

the area that you specify.

ae) Erasing a Performance Song (Song Clear) If you wish to discard your recording and re-record from the beginning, or if you wish to record a new performance, you must erase the previously-recorded data. T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears. | Trek | DpLpen Q000QC

2. Touch < CO > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch <Song Clear>.

The following message, asking you to confirm your choice, will be displayed. À Gear Song OK? IF you touch <Cancel>, the performance data will not be erased, and you will return to the Rec/Play screen.

4. If you touch <OK>, the performance data will

MED You can also use the following method to open the Song Clear screen. T Touch <Quick Guide> on the Main screen to display the Quick Guide screen.

2. Press the [Song] button.

The Song Clear screen appears. Changing the Name of a Performance Song (Rename) A name is automatically assigned to a performance song that you record. However, at some point you may wish to change the name to something more meaningful. T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears. Rec/P ATELIER-0 D) — | Trek |

2. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch <Save/Delete>.

The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears. 02:ATELIER-02 O3:ATELIER-03 O4:ATELIER-04

4. Touch < CO > (Utility) to open the Utility

The Rename screen appears.

6. Touch the character select button |

to switch among uppercase/lowercase/ symbols. Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle through the available choices, like this: uppercase lowercase -» symbols -» uppercase.

7 Touch the screen to specify the desired character. The following characters can be selected. ABCDEFGHIJKIMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijkimnopaqrstuvwxyz L'#%&'()"+,-./ =? 0123456789 Del Deletes a character. e) +] Inserts a space (blank). Move the cursor [the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input] to left or right. To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.

8. When you're done making the settings, touch

<OK>. The new name is now inserted. You cannot direcily change or edit the name of a performance song stored on a USB memory or floppy disk. The song must first be loaded [p. 181] into the instrument, edited, and then saved to USB memory or floppy disk again.

You can also access the Rename screen as follows. TL. Touch < G- {Utility} on the Rec/Play screen. The Utility screen appears.

2. in the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.

The Edit Menu screen appears.

3. Touch <Rename> on the Edit Menu screen.

The Rename screen appears.

| & AT-900_e.book 180 K—% 2007#Æ9A7H HA +F#H8#439 Fe MNT mn eee Recording/Playing Back What You Play Epeers RE LL] SIT aving Performance Songs The performance data that you recorded will disappear when the power of the ATELIER is turned off. If you wish to keep the performance data, you can save it on a USB memory, floppy disk, or “Favorites” [internal memory]. 02:ATELIER-02 If the recorded performance data has not been saved, the display will show the ” ” symbol. This symbol will disappear when you save the performance data. T. Prepare to save the performance song. I you want to save performance song to a USB memory, 5. Touch <—}>< +}> to select the save- connect the USB memory to the External memory destination media. connector. Select “Ext Memory” to save the data in USB memory, I you want to save performance song to a floppy disk, select “Disk” to save it on a floppy disk, or “Favorites” to connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector. save it in user memory. Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk that was formatted by the ATELIER. 6. Touch O--G- to select the number of the save destination. IF the save destination contains no data, the screen will

The Utility screen appears.

The Save Format screen appears.

4. Touch <Save/Delete>.

8. Touch the screen to select the format in which

Saving of the performance data will begin. Performance data saved by the ATELIER cannot be played back properly by the sound generator of an instrument that is not a member of the ATELIER series. Saving performance data in SMF format (SMF) requires a longer time than saving it in ATELIER format (Original). If the following screen appears If you select a number at which a performance data has already been saved and touch <Savey, the following screen appears. A overwrite Song OK? If you wish to update the contents of the performance data T. Touch <OK>. If you want to save your performance as new data without overwriting the existing data T: Touch <Cancel> to stop the Save operation.

2. In the Song Save/Song Delete screen, select

the number that is displayed as “-----"” (a number that currently does not contain performance data).

3. Save the performance data.

When saving is complete, the saved performance name will be displayed. What is the SMF Format? SMF (Standard MIDI File) is a data format that was created to provide music files compatibility between manufacturers. Loading Performance Songs Into the ATELIER

To edit {p. 190] or re-record a performance song that is stored on a USB memory or floppy disk, you must first load that song into the instrument. T Prepare the performance song. IF you want to load performance song to a USB memory, connect the USB memory to the External memory connector. I you want to load performance song to a floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector. Into the floppy disk drive, insert a floppy disk that was formatted by the ATELIER.

2. Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

3. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

I you want to load a song from USB memory, choose “Ext Memory." If you want to load a song from floppy disk, choose “Disk.”

6. Touch O--G- to select the performance

song that you wish to load into internal memory.

The selected performance data will be loaded into internal memory. If the following screen appears The message below is shown when the performance song in the unit has not been saved to USB memory. À Gear Song OK? If you wish to erase the performance song Te Touch the <OK> button. If you wish to erase the performance song T. Touch the <Cancel> button. Save the song to USB memory or a floppy disk {p. 180). I loading is canceled because the memory limit has been reached, the following message will be displayed: AÀ\ Wenory Ful

Deleting Performance Songs Stored on “Favorites” or the USB Memory You can delete a performance song that was saved onto a “Favorites,” USB memory, or floppy disk. If you want to delete a song in USB memory, connect your USB memory to the external memory connector before you continue. If you want to delete a song in floppy disk, connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert a floppy disk into the drive. T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch <Save/Delete>.

The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears. 02:ATELIER-02 OS:ATELIER-03

4. Touch < —}>< +}> to select the desired media.

If you want to delete a song from the “Favorites,” choose “Favorites.” I you want to delete a song from USB memory, choose “Ext Memory.” If you want to delete a song from floppy disk, choose “Disk.”

5. Touch <D--U- to select the performance

data that you wish to delete.

The confirmation message appears. Layering a New Recording onto SMF Music Files Delete Song OK? À 5 You can load commercially available SMF music files into the ATELIER, and record your own performance on top of it. During recording, the data you've loaded will be played [cancel ] Lx ] back, while you record your performance. T Prepare the SMF music files. IF you touch <Cancel> the performance data will not be deleted, and you will return to the Rec/Play screen. IF you're using SMF music files from USB memory, connect it to the external memory connector.

7. When you touch <OK> the performance data IF you're using SMF music files from a floppy disk,

will be deleted. connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk.

2. Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

3. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

If you want to play SMF music files from USB memory, choose "Ext Memory.” If you want to play SMF music files from floppy disk, choose "Disk."

6. Touch <D--U- to select the SMF music

Recording/Playing Back What You Play

7. Touch <Load>. The performance data you recorded can be saved on a USB

MEMD memory, “Favorites,” or floppy disk (p. 180). Commercially sold music files can also be loaded into ihe ATELIER, but for reasons of copyright protection, cannot be OTATELIER-OI saved in SMF format. O2:ATELIER-02 OS:ATELIER-03 , Using Song with a Different Tempo Than That of the Performance Song The selected performance data will be loaded into 1: Prepare the performance data whose tempo internal memory. you want to change. For track assignments of SMF format performance data I you're using performance data from USB memory, loaded to the ATELIER, refer to p. 169. connect it to the external memory connector. IF you're using performance data from a floppy disk,

8. Select the panel settings needed for recording connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector,

the performance. and insert the floppy disk.

9. Touch the <Bwd> button and <Fwd> button to 2: Load the performance data into the unit (p. 181].

move to the measure at which you wish to . . begin recording 3. Determine the tempo with the Tempo [-@][>] k buttons. À 7 NA TO.In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Rec> to enter recording-standby mode. 4. Hold down the panel [Reset] button and press the [Rec] button. <Play> and unrecorded track buttons in the screen will The tempo of the performance data will change. blink. The button indicators of tracks that are already recorded will light. Also, the panel [Rec] button indicator will light, and the You cannot carry out this operation with the <Reset> and [Play/Stop] button will blink. <Rec> in the Rec/Play screen. You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the MEMp [Rec] button. TT.Touch the Track button which you wish to recording (button flashes). T2.1n the Rec/Play screen, touch <Play> to begin recording. As you record, the music file that was loaded into the ATELIER will play back. 1 3:in the Rec/Play screen, touch <Stop> to stop recording. The track button for which performance data has been recorded will be lit. You can also start and stop recording by pressing the MEMp [Play/Stop] button.

6. Touch the “For” value [the number of

measures that will be re-recorded). Re-Recording Part of Your Performance [Punch-in Recording) ES Libé +} to set For” [he number of measures that will be re-recorded). Aller you have recorded a performance, you can re-record a specified portion of the performance. 8 h . With this method, you listen to the recorded performance, and + Touch <Exit>. re-record just the desired area. This recording method is called “Punch-in Recording." 9. Touch <Rec>. The Rec/Play screen appears, and the unit is placed in To Specify the Segment to be Recorded recording standby. Over Again Sectes messesssssseseeessece....... 10 Record While Listening to the Song T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears. TO.Press the Track button which you wish to re- record (indicator flashes).

2. Touch < CO > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears. TT.Touch <Play> to begin recording. When you touch <Play>, the metronome will play two

3. Touch <Punch In/Out> measures (bars) of countin before recording begins.

When you reach the first measure of the specified area, The Punch In/Out screen appears. recording will begin. When the specified area ends, recording will end, and playback will resume. — While the song is playing back or recording, the [Rec] button's indicator will be lit as follows. While the performance | The [Rec] buttons indicator is playing back will flash While you are re- The [Rec] button's indicator recording Will light constantly When recording has ended for the specified area and the data is once again playing back, the [Rec] button's indicator will resume flashing.

4. Touch the “From” value [the measure at which

recording will begin). T2. Touch <Stop> to stop the recording. The indicator of the track button which recorded the performance will light.

measure at which recording will begin). + 185

ae) Recording and Layering Drum Paris (Loop Recording) You can repeatedly record over a specified region of the rhythm part, adding additional notes at each pass. This type of recording is called “Loop Recording." This recording method is convenient when you wish to layer drum soundk individually for the Rhythm part. “Loop Recording” can be used only when recording the Rhythm part.

1. Press the [Drums/SFX] button or the [Manual

Perc] button to select a Drum Set or Sound Effect Set (p. 76-p. 79).

2. Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

3. Touch the <Bwd> and <Fwd> on the Rec/Play

screen, move to the measure where you wish to start Loop Recording.

4. Touch < CO > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

5. Touch <Loop Rec>.

The Loop Rec screen appears.

6. Touch the “For” value [the number of

measures that will be recorded repeatedly). To cancel operation, touch <Exit>.

7. Touch < —}>< +)> to specify the “For” value

{the number of measures that will be recorded repeatedly).

The Rec/Play screen appears, and the unit is placed in recording standby. D — TO.Touch <Play> to begin recording. When you touch the <Play>, the metronome will play 1wo measures (bars) of countin before recording begins. You can record repsatedly over he specified range of measures, adding additional notes at each pass. T.Touch <Stop> to stop playback. The indicator of the Rhythm track button which recorded he performance will light.

. = . 5. Touch the Count-In Rec setting (ON/OFF) to Starting recording at the right switch it between “ON/OFF." moment (Count-In Recording) a en run Re seing 1 vil This setting (ON/OFF] determines whether or not a Seing Description metronome countin [2 measures) will be heard after pressing : the [Play/Stop] button on recording. oN A Iwo-measure count will sound before recording T2 Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. OFF No count will sound before recording The Rec/Play screen appears.

The Utility screen appears. D —

| & AT-900_e.book 188 X— 2007#9A7H &HA F8#434 Recording/Playing Back What You Play Copying Performance Song Performance songs and SMF music files from USB memory or floppy disk can be copied to “Favorites” [user memory). If a performance song saved in USB memory or on a floppy disk is stored in “Favorites,” the stored performance song will not disappear even when you turn off the power. lt is convenient to load frequenily-used performance song into “Favorites.” Performance songs saved in “Favorites” can also be copied to USB memory or floppy disk. Copying Performance Songs from USB Memory to “Favorites” T: Connecting the USB memory to the external memory connector.

2. Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

3. Touch < CO > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

The following screen appears. Esù 6

7. Touch < —}><|+}> to select the media [the

location of the performance song you want to copyl. I you want to copy a performance song from USB memory, select “Ext Memory.” I you want to copy a performance song from floppy disk, select "Disk."

8. Touch 4D-4- to select the performance

song you want to copy.

9. Touch Favorites <D--U- to select the

copy-destination number. Numbers for which a song name is shown already have a song saved to them. TO.Touch <Execute>. The copying of the song to “Favorites” begins. Once the song has been accommodated in memory, the Song File Edit screen will reappear. If you select a number in which a song is already saved, a screen like the following will appear. A Gear Song OK? I you want to delete the previously saved song and overwrite it with the song you're newly saving, touch <OK>. I you don't want to delete the previously saved song, touch <Cancel>, then select a number at which no song has been saved, and copy the song to that number.

Copying Performance Songs from 4. Touch <File Edit. “Favorites” to USB Memory The Song File Edit screen appears. Recording/Playing Back What You Play

You can copy performance song from “Favorites” to USB memory. In this case, touch the arrow icon located in the center of the O2:ATELIER-02 O3:ATELIER-03 “Song File Copy screen” in step 6 of the above procedure, so the arrow points upwards. In this state, you'll be copying RER performance song from “Favorites” to USB memory. OS:ATELIER-05

5. Touch < -}>< +}> to select the media.

Choose Favorites” if you want to create a folder in [ “Favorites,” or “Ext Memory” if you want to create a folder in USB memory. =) ‘O

The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying A screen Will appear, allowing you to create a new performance song from USB memory to “Favorites.” folder. Creating a Folder in USB Nu Memory You can create folders in a connected USB memory device or in “Favorites.” If you want to create a folder in USB memory, connect the USB memory to the external memory connector. T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. 7 The Rec/Play screen appears. ° Assign a name to the folder. Touch the screen to specify the desired characters. Rename the folder as described in “Assigning a Name

2. Touch < CO > (Utility). to a Registration Set” {p. 111].

The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch <Song Select 8. When you've finished, touch <OK>.

0] UC <. '. The name will be assigned to the newly created folder. The Song Select screen appears.

| & AT-900_e.book 190 K—% 2007#Æ9A7H HA +FH8#439 & ||@ Editing Your Musical Performance Data Song files that you record can be edited using five different 2. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < @:- (Utility) to open the Utility screen. functions. The following editing functions are provided. Menu Descriptions Page Delete Measure | Deleting a Specific Measure. | p. 190 Delete the Recording from a Delete Track Track. p.191 Erase a specified portion of Erase Event the performance in a p. 193 specified area. Co Copying Measures. .195 a. . Py PY°8 P 3. In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>. Quantize Correct Timing Inaccuracies. | p. 196 The Edit Menu screen appears. Rename Change the name of the p. 178 performance data. Once you edit data, it cannot be restored to its original condition. As a precaution against accidents, we recommend that you save your song to a USB memory before you edit it (p. 180). Deleting a Specific Measure (Delete Measure) You can delete a portion of the performance data. This function lets you delete specified measures {bars} of the song ET from all tracks. When any part of the song file is deleted, subsequent recording will be moved forward to fill the gap. Delete Measure Example: To delete measures (bars) 5-8 [il2lsTaTsTeT7l8]eTo] T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears. Rec/Pley _ ATELIE RooTa

5. Touch the “From” value [the first measure that .

you wish to delete]. Delete the Recording from a Track (Delete Track) The ATELIER has seven tracks. This function lets you delete the recording from a track that you specify. Editing Your Musical Performance Data

6. Touch < —}>< +}> to set “From” (the first

measure that you wish to delete). For more on fhe content stored on each track, refer to p.

T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears. und KB)

7. When you're done making the settings, touch

8. Touch the “For” value [the number of

measures that you wish to delete].

9. Touch < -|>< +)> to set “For” [the number of

measures that you wish to delete]. To delete to the last measure, select “ALL.”

2. inthe Rec/Play screen, touch < {ER > [Utility] to

open the Utility screen. TO.When you're done making the settings, touch <Exit>. TT. Touch <Execute>. The following display appears. A Deiete Mezsure OK?

3. In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.

The Edit Menu screen appears. To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>. Me te Tr È + T2.Touch <OK:> to delete the measures. . ER When deletion has been completed, you are returned to Mn the Delete Measure screen.

The following display appears. Edit Menu A Deiete Track OK? The Delete Track (delete the performance data of a To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>. track] screen appears.

9. Touch <OK> to delete the performance data.

When the recording has been deleted, the Delete Track screen will reappear.

5. Touch the “Track” value [the track whose

performance data you wish to delete].

6. Touch < —}>< +)> to select the “Track” [the

track whose performance data you wish to delete). Setting RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO, CONTROL

7. When you're done making the settings, touch

Editing Your Musical Performance Data rase Recording [Erase Eveni) You can erase a specified portion of the performance in a specified area without making the song shorter. This is called the “Erase” function. As an alternative to the method of erasing all performance data in a specified area, you can erase the following contents of the performance. AL Al recording NOTE Notes played on the keyboard Panel operations, Content Saved to the Control Track PANEL {Information Other than Expression, Voice, and Tempo Data] — Refer to p. 165. EXPRESSION | Expression pedal recording VOICE Voice selfings TEMPO Tempo setting Example: Erasing measures (bars) 5-8 REINE : |: 7: EE blank measures T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears. | Trek |

2. inthe Rec/Play screen, touch < [E D (Utility) to

open the Utility screen.

3. In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.

The Edit Menu screen appears.

4. Touch <Erase Event.

Erase Event Quantize

5. Touch the “Event” value (the type of

performance data that you wish to erase).

6. Touch < —}>< +}> to specify the “Event” [the

type of performance data that you wish to erase). Erase Event Setting

ALL, NOTE, PANEL, EXPRESSION, VOICE, TEMPO

7. When you're done making the settings, touch

<Exit>. Ÿ 8. Touch the “Track” value (the track from which data will be erased).

9. Touch < —|>< +)> to specify the “Track” [the

track from which data will be erased). IF you have selected EXPRESSION, VOICE and TEMPO as the type of recording to be erased, you need not specify the track. Track ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO, CONTROL If you select “ALL,” the recording will be erased from all pars. T0.When you're done making the settings, touch <Exit>. T L.Touch the “From” value [the measure at which erasure will begin).

12. Touch < —}>< +}> to set “From” [the measure

at which erasure will begin). 13.When you're done making the settings, touch <Exit>.

14. Touch the “For” value (the number of

measures from which the data will be erased). 15S.Touch < —}>< +)> to set “For” (the number of measures from which the data will be erased). IF you wish to erase to the last measure [bar], set “for: ALL." T6.When you're done making the settings, touch <Exit>. T7. Touch <Execute>. The following display appears. À Erase Event ok? To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>. T8.Touch <OK> to erase the performance data. Once the performance data has been erased, you are returned to the Erase Event screen.

Editing Your Musical Performance Data Copying Measures (Cop This function lets you copy a portion of recorded song to a different measure [bar] location in the same track. If a recording already exists at the copy destination, it will be erased. Example: To copy measures (bars) 5-7 to measure (bar) 8 Cile2tstalstel7].

2. Inthe Rec/ Play screen, touch < {ER > (Utility) to

open the Utility screen.

3. In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.

The Edit Menu screen appears. Edit Menu

Event Copy Quantize L 8 The Copy screen appears.

5. Touch the “Track” value [the track to be D —

6. Touch <—}>< +)> to set “Track” [the track to

be copied). Track ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO, CONTROL If you select “ALL,” the recording in all the tracks will be copied. mea Soueuuoped POS IMOA EUNP3 | |

7. When you're done making the settings, touch

8. Touch the “From” value [the measure at which

9. Touch < _—}>< +}> to set “From” [the measure

at which copying will begin]. T0.When you're done making the settings, touch <Exit>. T LTouch the “For” value (the number of measures to be copied).

12. Touch < —}>< +}> to set “For” [the number of

measures to be copied). If you want to specify all of the data up to the final measure, select “ALL.” 13.When you're done making the settings, touch <Exit>. T4. Touch the “To” value [the copy-destination measure number). T5S.Touch < —}>< +}> to set “To” [the copy- destination measure number). If you select "END, ” the data will be copied following the end of the last measure. T6.When you're done making the settings, touch <Exit>.

17. Touch the “Time” value (the number of times

that the data will be copied). 18.Touch < —|>< +)> to set “Time” [the number of times that the data will be copied). 19.When you're done making the settings, touch <Exit>. 20.Touch <Execute>. The following display appears. À Cooy ok? To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>. 21.Touch <OK> to copy the measures. Once the measures have been copied, you are returned to the Copy screen.

Correct Timing Inaccuracies (Quantize) You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded performance by having the music be aligned with a timing you specify. This is called “Quantizing.” For example even if you intend to play at quarter-note timing, the notes may be slighily earlier or later than precise quarter- note intervals. In this case, if you quantize at quarter-note (1/

4) timing, you can correcily match the rhythms.

T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears. Rec/P ATE

to open the Utility screen.

3. In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.

The Edit Menu screen appears.

4. Touch <Quantize>. TO.When you're done making the settings, touch

<Exit>. T LTouch the “For” value (the number of measures that will be quantized). T2. Touch < —}>< +)> to set “For” (the number of measures that will be quantized). To specify everything through to the last measure, set “for: ALL." 13.When you're done making the settings, touch <Exit>.

14. Touch the Resolution” value (the resolution at

which notes will be aligned).

15. Touch the screen to set “Resolution” [the

resolution at which notes will be aligned). The “Resolution” [the timing to which notes are aligned) can be set to one of the following settings. Half note Quarter note Quarter note triplet

5. Touch the “Track” value [the track that will be J J J:

quantized). &th note &th note triplet 16th note

6. Touch < —}>< +}> to specify the “Track” [the }) à. à

track that will be quantized). 16 note triplet 32th note À À _— T6.When you're done making the settings, touch Es <Exit>. Le noc/stey purs | T7. Touch <Execute>. on The following display appears. Track À Guentize Ok? ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO IF you select "ALL," the recording in all the tracks will be quantized. To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.

7. When you're done making the settings, touch

mea Soueuuoped POS IMOA EUNP3 | | <Exit>. T8.Touch <OK> to have the quantization carried

8. Touch the “From” value [the measure at which out.

quantization will begin). When the quantizing is finished, you are returned to the Quantize screen.

9. Touch < —|>< +)> to set “From” [the measure

at which quantization will begin).

CIE AT-900_e.book 198 K— 2007#9A7H &HA F8#43 Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms You can create a rhythm for use when Rhythm Mode is set to “S-SERIES” (p. 215). An original rhythm of your own is created by starting with one of the internal rhythms, then modifying it. You can edit some ofthe internal rhythms to create your own original rhythms. These original rhythms are called “User Rhythms.” This function is called “Rhythm Customize.” Process for Creating User Rhythms Preparations for Creating User Rhythms ( Open the Rhythm Customize screen

( Select the division

( Load the source rhythm

( Make the division settings

Creating the User Rhythm

Frs ( Edit the rhythm ) ( Change the percussion Saving the User Rhythm ( Changing the name of a User Rhythm (Save the User Rhyihm to the User memory or USB memory Copying the User Rhythm + Copy User Rhythm on USB memory to the User Memory + Copy User Rhythm on User Memory to the USB memory

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms

When calling up a source. Preparations for Creating User Rhythms Displaying the Rhythm Customize Screen Te Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen. sens FL The Rhyihm screen appears. 6 Le Roc/rtay © Rhythm En) | 3 | Division Name (p. 200)

2. In the Rhythm screen, touch < [5 (Utility). En ES br

The Utility screen appears. 4° | Switches the page when the rhythm pattern is displayed over multiple pages. Œ © (Zoom Oùt/Zoom In) button > — Expands (zooms in] and reduces (zooms oui] the rhythm pattern display. 6 | Current location [Measure: Beat: Tick) Instrument Name 7 | Indicates the name of the instrument used in the rhythm. 8 Rhythm Pattern Display Displays the notes in the selected rhythm pattern.

3. Touch <Customize>. BD wiiit button

The Rhythm Customize screen appears. 9 | Displays the menu with settings for the Rhythm Customize function. When opening a new Rhythm Customize screen 10 >/2| (Preview) button Allows you to listen to the created rhythm. 11 mi] (Delete) button Deletes the rhythm in the displayed measure. E5] (Copyl button Copies ihe rhythm in the displayed measure and adds it to the end of that measure. Din 13 | When more than eight different instruments are used in a rhythm, press these buttons to switch through the instrument names. Scroll Bar 14 | This indicates the position of the current measure in the overall rhythm. suuAuu ueuueduosoy peuBuO Buneo1D

| & AT-900_e.book 200 K—% 2007#9A7H HA +FH8#439 Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms lle! Selecting the Division What is the Division? A song progresses in predictable a sequence, such as intro, melody À, melody B, bridge and ending. With the ATELIER, such changes in songs are allocated to the following six performance states. We call these six parts of a song “Divisions.” Division Performance division Intro The intro is played at the start of a song. Original This is a basic accompaniment pattern. This is a phrase inserted at a juncture where Fill In To the mood changes. lt is used to make a song Varia more lively. ANA" | After the phrase is played, the variation’s accompaniment pattern is played. Le This is a developmental accompaniment Variation : Le en pattern. lt is a variation on an Original. This is a phrase inserted at a juncture where Fill In To the mood changes. lt is used to make a song Original more sedate. g After the phrase is played, the original's accompaniment pattern is played. Ending This is played at the end of a song. You can make a song more lively or more restrained by increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions. You can also modify a song by changing the voice of the parts in the Divisions. Te Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 199). UserRhythm 1

2. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears. 00 EE LL: 00 EE LL: You can open the Division Select screen by touching the MEMD Division name indication (p. 199] in the Rhythm Customize screen. on name to select the Division. This returns you to the Rhythm Customize screen. The name of the selected division now appears in the Rhythm Customize screen. You can touch < > to hear how the rhythm sounds.

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms

. 4. Touch Group/Media < —|>< +}> to select Loading the Rhythm Rhythm group. Use the Rhythm Customize function to select the rhythm you want to use as the base for the rhythm you are creating. DestAIl Te Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 199). [UserRhythn 1] 4/4

5. Touch <fW-<£3- to switch the screen, then

The Utility screen appears. You can touch <Preview> to hear how the rhythm sounds.

6. Touch Division < —|>< +}> to select the

Division you want to call up.

3. Touch <Load>. Selecting “ALL” calls up all of the Divisions.

The Rhythm Load screen appears.

7. Use the Variation buttons of the panel to

Desai | change the arrangement of the accompaniment.

Making the Division Settings Independent “Drum Set,” “Beat,” and “Volume” settings can be made for each Division. Te Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 199). Std Close HH Std Bot Short Guiro Long Guiro Block

2. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch <Div Options> (Division Options].

The Division Options screen appears.

Changing the Drum Set

4. Touch the value set for Drum Set.

5. Touch < —}>< +)> to change the setting.

The Division Options screen reappears. Changing the Beat

7. Touch the Beat setting.

8. Touch < —|>< +)> to change the setting.

The Division Options screen reappears. Changing the Volume TO.Touch the Volume setting.

Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms Touch < —|>< +)> to change the setting. T2.Touch <Exit>. The Division Options screen reappears. Creating the User Rhythm Editing the Rhythm Edit the internal rhythm. What you can do Page Copying the Rhythm in a Selected Measure p. 203 Deleting the Rhythm in a Selected Measure p. 203 Erasing Sounds p. 204 Adding Sounds p. 204 Altering Voices p. 205 Changing the Velocity p. 205 Moving Sounds p. 205 Copying the Rhythm in a Selected Measure T Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 199).

2. Touch <Copyz> [to copy the selected measure).

Std Close HH Std Bot Short Guiro Long Guiro Hi VoodBlock Copy OK? measure 1 to 2 To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.

Copies the rhythm in the displayed measure and addks it to the end of that measure. Deleting the Rhythm in a Selected Measure Te Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 199).

2. Touch <Del> [to copy the selected measure).

The selected measure is deleted.

You can add and erase sounds, alter voices, and change the velocity. Te Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 199). Short Guiro Long Guiro Hi VoodBlock

2. Touch the point on the screen where the sound

you want to edit is located. When you touch the screen, a line appears at the point you touch. By holding your finger to the screen and moving it to the left or right, you can have the line move along with your finger. Std Bot Short Guiro Long Guiro Hi VoodBlock The information on the location [Measure: Beat: Tick] of the line on the screen is displayed. When you remove your finger from the screen, the Note Edit screen opens, and the note positioned at the line in the Rhythm Customize screen is displayed. 1259 stéoi 1259 | StéClose## | 101 1290 | Sté Close 1292 | Short Guro 13 0 | Sté Close Hh You can touch < > to open the Ufility screen, and MEMD then touch <Note Edit> in the Utility screen to open the Note Edit screen. Erasing Sounds

4. When you touch <Erase>, the selected sound is

erased. Adding Sounds

5. Touch < MN -< MB - to select the point

where you want to add the sound.

6. When you touch <Create>, the new sound is

added after the selected sound.

an. | & AT-900_e.book 205 K— 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#43 Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms Altering Voices 7 Touch < WEB >< to select the sound whose voice you want to change.

9. Touch <-8><-1><+1><+8> to switch the voice.

Changing the Velocity 10.Touch < MS >< MB > to select the sound whose velocity you want to change. TT .Touch the Velocity setting. M22 (Slot 7 [I 1259 stéoi 1259 | Sté Close # 1260 || short a 290 | Sté Ciose #4 1292 | Short Guro 13 0 | ste Close #4 T2. Touch <-10><-1><+1><+10> to change the velocity. Moving Sounds 13.Touch < MS >< MB > to select the sound you want to move. T4. Touch the “Meas Beat Tick” setting. The note-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick” as the format. A tick is a unit of time that's shorter than a beat.

Sound/kBo| Short Guire Sté Close H4 T5.Touch <-30><-1><+1><+30> to move the sound. With the Rhythm Customize function, note locations are expressed in terms of “Measure: Beat: Tick.” One tick is the smallest unit used in indicating the location of the note, and there are 120 ticks in a quarter note. Typical notes might be indicated as shown below. Quarter Note 8th Note 1:10 1:2:0 1:3:0 1:40 2:1:0 2:1:60 2:2:0 2:2:60 {1 measure: 1 beat: O tick) 8th Note Triplet 16th Note

Changing and Deleting the Instruments Used You can change an instrument used in a rhythm and replace it with another instrument. T Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 199).

2. Touch the section in the Rhythm Customize screen

where the instrument names are displayed. stasot || Short Guiro Long Guiro Hi VosdBlock Std BD 1 F 1 Short Guiro | Rec/Play Long Guiro Hi MoodBlock [ MED You can open Instrument Edit screen using the à following procedure.

1. Touch < [5 (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

2. Touch <inst Edit> [Instrument Edit).

t The Instrument Edit screen appears. D. ing the Instrument Used

3. Touch <D--U- in the screen to select the

name of the instrument you want to change.

The following screen appears.

5. Touch <Æ}-<{- to switch the screen, then

touch the instrument name. The following screen appears. Æ instrument C (| A Change Instrument 0k? [2 sonéreo To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.

6. If you want to change the instrument, touch

<Ok>. The instrument is changed. Deleting an Instrument You can delete an instrument used in a rhythm. When an instrument is deleted, all of the sounds using that instrument are deleted from the rhythm.

7. Touch O--G- in the screen to select the

name of the instrument you want to delete.

8. Touch <Delete> on the Instrument Edit screen.

À Delete Instrument OK? To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.

9. If you are sure that you wish to delete the

instrument, touch <OK>. The selected instrument is deleted.

The Rhyihm Save screen appears. Deleting Rhythms You Have Created This deletes User rhythms created by partially editing the internal rhythms. Te Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 199).

2. Touch < CO > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

The Rename screen appears.

The following screen appears.

5. Touch the character select button (SEE) >

to switch among uppercase/lowercase/ À clear Rhythm ok? symbols. Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle | x | through the available choices, like this: uppercase - lowercase -+ symbols -> uppercase.… To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>. 6. Touch the screen to specify the desired character. The following characters can be selected.

4. If you are sure that you wish to delete the

rhythm, touch <OK>. ABCDEFGHIJKIMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ aving the User Rhythm abcdefghifkimnoparsiuvwxyz I"#%&'(]*+,-./:=21 0123456789 Changing the Name of a User Rhythm = Deletes a character. (Rename) g Te Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. Space) Inseris a space [blank]. ë 199). Move the cursor [the symbol that ê +) ») indicates the location at which È

2. Touch < LE | > [Utility]. characters will be inpui) to left or right. :

The Uiliy screen appears. To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>. É

3. Touch <Savez. Z7+ When you're done making the settings, touch 2

ae) Saving User Rhythms to the User Memory or USB Memory You can take User rhythms created with the Rhythm Customize function and save them in the ATELIER's User memory and USB memory. To call up rhythms saved in User memory, press the [User] button. Te Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 199).

2. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

The Rhythm Save screen appears. © Rhythm Lu) Æ. Touch < —}>< +}> to determine the save destination. Select “Ext Memory” to save the data in USB memory, or “Favorites” to save if in user memory.

5. Touch O--G- to select the number of the

Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be displayed as “----…. To cancel the save, touch the <Exit> to close the Rhythm Save screen. You can change the name of a rhythm by touching <Rename>.

The User rhythms are saved to the User memory or to USB memory. You can save rhythms after changing the tempo by touching NEMD the Tempo [ € ] [ B> ] button. If the following screen appears The following screen appears if you select a number to which a rhythm has already been saved and then touch <Save>. A overwrite Rhythm OK? If you wish to overwrite the rhythm T: Touch <OK>. The Rhythm will be rewritten. If you wish to save new data instead of updating the rhythm

Rewriting of the Rhythm will be canceled.

2. In the Rhythm Save screen, select the number

that is displayed as “-----” (a number that currently does not contain rhythm data).

ll Various Other Settings Adijusting How the Instrument Adjusting the Depth of Aftertouch Responds This adiusts the depfh of the Aflertouch effect. Aftertouch can only be enabled for the Upper keyboard. Turning Aftertouch On/Off T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. This switches the aftertouch setting for the Upper keyboard. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. Aftertouch applies vibrato when additional pressure is placed on the keys that are being played. 2. Touch <Upper> Afiertouch can only be enabled for the Upper keyboard. The Upper Keyboard screen appears. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears. 3. Touch <E-< 03 > to display the After Touch Sensitivity. Ful Organt Le Ful Strngs L Lover gent MürcnstrEns Sao Pa

3. Touch <Æ]><[> to display the After Touch.

5. Touch < —}>< +}> to edit the value.

4. Touch the After Touch setting to switch

between “ON” and “OFF.” Seing Each time you touch the After Touch setting, it will alternate between “ON' and “OFF.” 1-10 Higher settings of this value will allow deeper vibrato to SEting) be applied when you apply pressure to the keyboard. ON, OFF

sBuneS 1euIO SnouëA |. Please note that not all the voices on the Upper keyboard are responsive to Affertouch, even if the feature is set to ON. For details, refer to the Voice List (Appendix: separate booklet] ni 209 où +

| & AT-900_e.book 210 K— 2007#9A7H &HA F8#434 an. Various Other Settings _+1@ Adjusting the Initial Touch Sensitivity Initial Touch is a function that translates the force used in playing the keys into a directly proportional amount of volume. This adjusts the amount of the Initial Touch effect applied. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch either <Upper>, or <Lower>.

Upper To change the initial touch setting of ppe the Upper part Lower To change the initial touch setting of the Lower part

3. Touch <Æ}-<{3- to display the Initial Touch.

4. Touch the Initial Touch value (OFF, 1-10).

5. Touch < -}>< +}> to edit the value.

Setting Descriptions Initial Touch is on. Striking the keys more forcetully will produce correspondingly louder 1-10 sounds. The change in volume when the keys are played forcetully increases as the value is increased. Initial Touch is off. OFF Volume remains constant regardless of how hard you play.

Changing the Pedalboard Polyphony You can set the Bass Pedalboard to play simultaneous multiple notes or single notes only. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

The Pedalboard screen appears.

between “MONOPHONIC” and *POLYPHONIC.” Each time you touch the PedalBass Mode setting, it will alternate between “MONOPHONIC" and POLYPHONIC." Setting Descriptions MONOPHONIC | Only single notes can be played. POLYPHONIC Multiple notes can be played.

Various Other Settings Performance Function Settings Selecting the keyboard affected by the damper pedal You can specify which keyboard will be affected when you press the Damper {Sustain) pedal. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch <Controller>.

The Controller screen appears.

4. Touch the Damper Pedal setting to switch

between “to UPPER” and “to LOWER.” Each time you touch the Damper Pedal setting, it will alternate between “to UPPER” and “to LOWER." Setting Descriptions The effect is applied to the voices played to UPPER |, jhe Upper keyboard. do Lower | Te efect is applied to the voices played on the Lower keyboard.

Changing the Function of the Expression Pedal Specify how the Expression Pedal will function when your performance is being recorded and when ATELIER song files are being played back. Function During Recording Specify whether Expression Pedal operations will be recorded or not while your performance is being recorded. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch <Controller>.

The Controller screen appears.

between “PEDAL” and “COMPOSER.” Each time you touch the Exp. Src (Rec) setting, it will alternate between “PEDAL" and "COMPOSER." Setting Descriptions Expression Pedal movements will be recorded. The previous recording will be erased as new songs are recorded. PEDAL Expression Pedal movements will not be recorded. The previous data will remain without being erased. COMPOSER

| & AT-900_e.book 212K—% 2007#Æ9A7H HA +FH8#439 Various Other Settings _+1@ ele! anal aol Function During Playback You can specify whether or not the Expression Pedal will function while ATELIER song files are being played back. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch <Controller>.

The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch <fS-<Œ3- to display the Exp. Src

(Play). PEDAL+COMPOSER

5. Touch < —}>< +)> to change the setting.

Choosing the keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will apply This setting determines which keyboard will be controlled by the Pitch Bend/Vibrato lever. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch <Controller>.

The Controller screen appears.

Setting Descriptions PEDAL The Expression Pedal will function. 5. Touch < —}>< +)> to change the setting. COMPOSER Expression Pedal recording within the

• song file will also be effective. Sehing Descriptions The Expression Pedal will not Lo upper | The effect is applied to the voices played composer | function. The Expression Pedal on the Upper keyboard. recording within the song file will be — - effective. to LOWER The effect is applied to the voices played on the Lower keyboard. The Expression Pedal will function. — - PEDAL The Expression Pedal recording toPEDAL | "© she cpple lo the voices played within the song file will be ignored. on te Pedalboard.

| & AT-900_e.book 213 X—% 2007#Æ9A7H HA +FH8#439 & ||@ an. Various Other Settings Changing the Pitch Bend Range Adjusting the Sensitivity of the D Beam Controller This setting allows you to choose the maximum amount of Pitch change (range) permissible when using Pitch Bend. The range can be set anywhere between 1-12 [in semitone units; with a maximum of one octave). You can adjust the sensitivity of the D Beam controller. Increasing this setting will make the D Beam controller more responsive.

1. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen. The sensitivity of the D Beam controller can vary depending on

the brighiness of the surroundings. If it does not operate as The Sound/Keyboard . e Sound/Keyboard screen appears you expect, please readiust the sensitivity.

2. Touch <Controller>. T. Touch <Sound/KBD> on the Main screen.

The Controller screen appears. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

3. Touch <fW-<£3- to display the Pitch Bend 2. Touch <Controller>.

Range. The Controller screen appears.

4. Touch the D Beam Sensitivity setting.

5. Touch < —}>< +}> to change the setting.

Setting 1-12 (semitone steps] 5. Touch < —}>< +}> to change the setting.

6. Touch <Exit>. Sekting

1-10 Drums/SFX is fixed at one octave range, regardless of this seing.

sSumes 140 snouëA This seing remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

ae) Turning Chord Hold On/Off The Chord Hold function can be switched ON/OFF. When Chord Hold is ON, the Automatic Accompaniment will continue playing even when you lift your hand from the keyboard to play a new chord. Te Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

The Rhythm Options screen appears.

5. Touch the Chord Hold setting to switch

between “ON” and “OFF.” Each time you touch the Chord Hold setting, it will alternate between “ON' and “OFF.” Setting Descriptions The Automatic Accompaniment determined by the chord played on the Lower keyboard is held (even if you release the keys].

When you release the keys that you played in the Lower keyboard, the OFF Automatic Accompaniment will stop [be muted). Only the Rhythm (drum) performance will continue.

Changing the Intro Countdown Sound (Count Down Sound) You can change the sound that is used for the count played at the end of the intro with the Intro Countdown function (p. 88). Te Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

The Rhythm Options screen appears.

5. Touch the Count Down Sound setting to switch

between “VOICE” and “STICK.” Each time you touch the Count Down Sound setting, it Will alternate between "VOICE" and "STICK." Setting Descriptions VOICE Human voice count (One, two, three...) STICK Stick sound count

Various Other Settings Preventing Rhythm Tempos from Switching Automatically You can prevent rhythm tempos from switching automatically when you switch rhythms. Te Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears. Touch <Options>. The Rhythm Options screen appears. Touch <£9-<Æ£3- to display the Auto Std Tempo (Auto Standard Tempo). ORIGINAL

5. Touch the Auto Std Tempo setting to switch

between “ON” and “OFF.” Each time you touch the Auto Std Tempo setting, it will alternate between “ON' and “OFF.” Changing the Operation of the Fill In Button and Intro/Ending Buttons You can change the operation of the Fill In [Auto] button, [Break] button, [Intro] button, and [Ending] button so that they work in the same way as on the S-series. Te Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen. The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < CO > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears. Touch <Options>. The Rhythm Options screen appears. Touch <fS-<£3- to display the Rhythm Mode. I Rhythm Of

5. Touch the Rhythm Mode setting to switch

between “ORIGINAL” and “S-SERIES.” Each time you touch the Rhythm Mode setting, it will alternate between “ORIGINAL” and "S-SERIES.” Setting Descriptions Switching the rhythm while the rhythm is one) Bains ON stopped automatically changes the The function of the Fill In [Auto] button, tempo settings to those in the new ORIGINAL | [Break] button, [Intro] button, and rhythm. [Ending] button will not change. The tempo settings are not changed The function of the Fill In [Auto] button, OFF automatically when the rhythms are [Break] button, [Intro] button, and changed. [Ending] button will change. |. Fill In [Auto] button —> Fill In [To _

6. Touch <Exit>. S-SERIES Variation] button È

[Break] button — Fill In [To Original] 5 This setting remains stored in memory even while power is button el turned off. [Intro] button —> [Break] button Ê [Ending] button + [Intro/Ending] button É

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off. Placing the Panel Overlay Sheet I you've set Rhyihm Mode to "S-SERIES,” you can place the panel overlay sheet included with the ATELIER on the panel so that the button functions will be easy to see. T Place the panel overlay sheet as shown in the illustration below. Fill In To To Variation Original Intro/ Break Ending On the panel overlay sheet are printed the names of the buttons for when Rhythm Mode is set to "S-SERIES." Button Descriptions Fill In [To A filkin (p. 89) will be played, and Variation] then an elaborate rhythm pattern button will play. Fill In [To A filkin (p. 89) will be played, and Original] then a basic rhythm pattern will button play. Stop the rhythm at the end of that [Break] button | sure (Break. This lets you start the rhythm with an intro or stop the rhythm with an ending. [ntro/Ending] button Starting the Rhythm (if Rhythm Mode is ’S-SERIES”) Starting with an Added Intro T. Press the [Intro/Ending] button. The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts. While the Intro is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark.

Making the Intro Short and Simple T. Press the Fill In [To Variation] or Fill In [To Original] button. [Start/Stop] button indicator will blink. The indicator for the Fill In [To Variation] or [To Original] button will blink.

2. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts. Starting Without an Intro T Press the [Start/Stop] button. The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played. Stopping the Rhythm (if Rhythm Mode is ’S-SERIES”) Stopping with an Ending T. Press the [Intro/Ending] button. An Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops. While the Ending is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Ending finishes the button indicator will be turned off.

Making the Ending Short and Simple T Press the [To Variation] or [To Original] button, and then press the [Start/Stop] button. A short Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops. Stopping without an Ending T Press the [Start/Stop] button. The Rhythm stops without an Ending being played.

Various Other Settings Registration Settings Changing the Timing at Which Arranger Settings are Recalled You can specify how the settings related to Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled when you press a Registration button. Te Touch <Registration> on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

The Registration Options screen appears. INSTANT INSTANT

4. Touch the Arranger Update setting to switch

between “DELAYED” and “INSTANT.” Each time you touch the Arranger Update setting, it will alternate between “DELAYED” and “INSTANT.” Setting Descriptions Settings related to Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled when you hold a Registration button for several secondk. lf you quickly press the Registration button, only the panel settings (voice, etc.) that are not related to Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will be updated. DELAYED Settings related to Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled the instant you press a button along with all other panel settings. INSTANT

MED This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off. Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled You can specify how the transpose setting will be recalled when you press a Registration button. Te Touch <Registration> on the Main screen. The Registration Load screen appears.

2. Touch < > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

The Registration Options screen appears. INSTANT INSTANT

4. Touch the Trans. Update (Transpose Update)

setting to switch between “DELAYED” and INSTANT.” Each time you touch the Trans. Update setting, it will alternate between “DELAYED” and “INSTANT.” Setting Descriptions Transpose settings will be recalled when DELAYED | you hold a Registration button for several seconds. Transpose setting will be recalled the INSTANT | instant you press a button along with all other panel settings.

This seing remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

| & AT-900_e.book 218 X—% 2007#9A7H &HA F8#43 an. Various Other Settings ele! anal aol Composer Settings Switching the Display of Lyrics On or Off Some music files have Lyrics included and these Lyrics can be displayed on the screen. You can turn on or off the lyrics display of such music files. T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < CO > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

4. Touch <f9-<- to display the Lyrics.

5. Touch the Lyrics setting to switch between

“ON” and “OFF.” Touch the setting to toggle the display of lyrics “ON” (visible) or “OFF” hidden].

If you press a voice select button while playing back music files that contains lyrics, the display screen will switch, and the lyrics will no longer be displayed. To re-display the lyrics, touch <Play> on Rec/Play screen once again. MED This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Changing the Key When Playing Back Songs (Play Transpose) SMF music files or a performance that you yourself recorded can be transposed for playback. T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < CO > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

6. Touch <—}>< +)> to change the setting.

The key is transposed by one semitone each time the <=]> or <|+]> key is touched. Setting -6-0-5 (semitone steps)

Various Other Settings Changing the Metronome Setting You can change the way in which the metronome will sound. T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < CO > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

4. Touch <fS-<£Z- to display the Metronome.

6. Touch < —}>< +}> to change the setting.

Setting Descriptions OFF Not heard at all REC Heard only while recording ON Heard constantly

Adjusting the Metronome Volume You can adjust the volume of the metronome. T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < CO > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

6. Touch < —}>< +}> to change the setting.

Setting 1-10 increasing the value will raise the volume of the metronome.

ae) Changing the Sound of the Metronome You can choose one of 4 different sounds for the metronome. T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < CO > (Utili

The Utility screen appears.

The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

5. Touch the Metronome Sound setting.

6. Touch < —}>< +)> to change the setting.

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Setting the Beat This setting determines the beat to be used when recording performance songs. T Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < CO > (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

4. Touch <fW-<ŒZ- to display the Beat.

5. Touch the Beat setting.

The time signature setting screen appears.

6. Touch the time signature that you wish to set.

IF you're using rhythm performance or automatic MEMD accompaniment, the time signature will be specified automatically. You cannot change the beat of previously recorded songs.

Various Other Settings Other Settings Adjust the Standard Pitch (Master Tune) The basic pitch of an instrument is generally considered as the pitch of the middle A note. The “Master Tune” parameter lets you adjust this basic pitch to match the pitch of any other instruments that are playing together with the ATELIER. Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

4. Touch < —}>< +)> to change the setting.

By touching < | Fætry] >, you can restore the default setting MEMD (440.0 Hz). This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off. Adjusting the mic echo You can adjust the mic echo that will apply to a connected mic. NEMD Connecting the Microphone (p. 25] Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

4. Touch < —}>< +}> to change the setting.

This seing remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

ae) Enabling Transmission of PC Numbers Transmission of PC (Program Change) numbers can be switched ON/OFF when a Registration is selected. Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

3. Touch the Send PC Switch setting to switch

between “ON” and “OFF.” Each time you touch the Send PC Switch setting, it will alternate between “ON' and “OFF.” Setting Descriptions ON PC numbers are transmitted OFF PC numbers are not transmitted

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Setting the PC Number You can specify the Program Change number that will be transmitted from MIDI Out when a Registration is selected. Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

4. Touch < —}>< +)> to change the setting.

Various Other Settings

*_ When the pedal part button is ON, data received at the MIDI In connector will control the pedal part of keyboard sound e pai Yi generator. When the pedal part button is OFF, data received at This instrument contains two sound generators: one for GM2/ the MIDI In connector will control the GS sound generator. GS data playback and one for keyboard performance. Normally, data received at the MIDI In connector will control 4. Touch <Exit>. only the sound generator for GM2/GS data playback. However by changing the MIDI IN Mode setting, you can also This seing remains stored in memory even while power is control the keyboard sound generator from MIDI In. turned of. Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears. Selecting the MIDI Transmit Channel

2. Touch <Æ%><Œ2- to display the MIDI IN Mode. When you use the MIDI connectors or the USB connector of

the ATELIER to transmit musical data to external devices, for each keyboard (Upper, Lower, and Pedal] you can specify the channel on which your playing will be transmitted as MIDI messages. un NEMD For details refer to “Connecting MIDI Devices” [p. 244]. LRU Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

3. Touch the MIDI IN Mode setting to switch

between “MODE 1” and “MODE 2.” Each time you touch the MIDI IN Mode setting, it will alternate between “Mode 1” and "Mode 2.” MODE 1 an instrument as a GS sound Channels 5 fhrough 10 and Channel 12, 14, MODE 2 | D er anna ae tan e Keyboard sound generator. Channel MODE 1 MODE 2 1 GS Solo 2 Gs Pedal/GS * 3 Gs Lower n Gs Upper 5-10 Gs Gs ni Gs Drum/SFX Ë 12 cs cs el 13 Gs Manual Percussion £ 1415 |Gs Gs é 16 Gs Control

3. Touch < —|>< +}> to change the setting.

MIDI messages for the Solo part will be transmitted only when the Solo [To Lower] button is ON.

Adjusting the Brighiness of the Display You can adjust the brighiness of the display. Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

4. Touch < —}>< +}> to change the setting.

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

soc: MNT mo are Lee Various Other Settings Eliminating the Bouncing Ball from the Switching the Background of the Main Main Screen Screen You can set the main screen so that the bouncing ball does not You can change the color and pattern for the main screen's appear. background. Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears. The System screen appears.

2. Touch <S-<£Z- to display the Main 2. Touch <S-<ŒZ- to display the Main

Bouncing Ball. Background.

3. Touch the Main Bouncing Ball setting to switch 3. Touch the Main Background setting. D—

between “ON” and “OFF.” Each time you touch the Main Bouncing Ball setting, it 4. Touch < —}>< +)> to change the setting. Will alternate between "ON" and “OFF.” Setting Descriptions oN The bouncing ball appears in the main screen. OFF The bouncing ball does not appear in the main screen.

MED This seHing remains stored in memory even while power is tumed off. 5. Touch <Exit>. The System screen appears.

6. Touch <Exit> on the System Screen.

The main screen appears with the selected background. This seing remains stored in memory even while power is turned off. sSumes 140 snouëA

ae) Changing the External Memory Setting In some cases, when USB memory is connected to the external memory connector, it may take longer for data to be loaded, or data may fail to be loaded successfully. I this occurs, you may be able to solve the problem by changing the external memory setting. Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

between “Mode 1” and “Mode 2.” Each time you touch the Ext Memory Mode setting, it will alternate between “Mode 1” and "Mode 2.” Setting MODE 1, MODE 2

5. Turn on the power once again.

Turning the Remote Function On/Off You can turn the Remote function on (enabled) or off (disabled). Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

3. Touch the Remote Control setting to switch

between “ON” and “OFF.” sn — Each time you touch the Remote Control setting, it will alternate between “ON” and “OFF.” Setting Descriptions The remote control unit will operate the ON ATELIER. The remote control unit will be disabled. OFF You will not be able to operate the ATELIER using the remote control.

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Various Other Settings Changing the Functions of the Remote Control’s Buttons These let you change the functions that are assigned to the remote control’s [FUNC 1] button and [FUNC2] button. Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch <fS-<£3- to display the “Remote Ctrl:

Ctrl: FUNC2> setting.

4. Touch < —}>< +}> to change the setting.

Using the V-LINK function Connecting the ATELIER to a V-LINK compatible image device allows you to control the images with the ATELIER. V-LINK VANK ( LÆA774" | is a function that allows music and images to be performed together. By using MIDI to connect two or more V-LINK compatible devices, you can easily enjoy a wide range of visual effects that are linked to the expressive elements of a music performance. How to Use the V-LINK Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

2. Touch <fS-<ŒZ- to display the V-LINK.

3. Touch the V-LINK setting.

4. Touch < —}>< +}> to change the setting.

Setting Descriptions OFF The V-LINK function is switched off. The V-LINK function is switched on. You = an MODE | can now control the video images using Setting Descriptions the Registration buttons. Mutes the sound of the melody, or The V-LINK function is switched on. You MELODY es . pre . MUTE minimizes the vocal sounds of a music can now control the video images using CD (p. 264, p. 269). the twelve rightmost keys of the lower MODE2 | keyboard and Registration buttons. Lowers the volume of the melody ° GUIDE 4 No sound is produced when you press (p.264). any ofthe twelve keys at he right end of LYRICS Switches display of lyrics on (displayed) the keyboard. or off {hidden} {p. 218).

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

IE AT-900_e.book 228 X—% 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#43 Various Other Settings The VLINK function is turned on, and the VLINK icon appears in the main screen. The Send PC Switch settings is automatically switched to ON when VLINK is on (MODE 1, MODE 2). When ihe V- MEMD LINK function is switched off, the Send PC Switch setting reverts to the setting in effect before V-LINK was switched on. (When V-LINK is set to ‘MODE 1” à When a Registration button is pressed, “Bank Select" and “Program Change Number” messages are transmitted from the MIDI Out connector as video control messages. At this time, the Control MIDI transmit channel setting is disregarded, and the messages are transmitted via Channel 16. When V-LINK is set to “MODE 2” In addition to the functions of “MODE 1,” MODE 2 also sets the device to transmit "Note messages" as video control messages from the MIDI Out connector when one of the twelve rightmost keys in the Lower keyboard is pressed. In this case, the Lower and Solo MIDI transmit channel settings are disregarded, and the messages are transmited via Channel 16. The MIDI transmit channel used for video control messages is fixed at channel 16. \ JS For more on switching video images, refer to the owner's manuel for 1he connected device.

You can also use the following procedure to turn the V-LINK function on.

1. Hold down the Composer [Reset] button

and press either the Upper Organ [Full 1] button or the Upper Organ [Full 2] button. Holding down the Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full 1] button switches the instrument to "MODE 1” [p. 227). Holding down the Composer [Reseï] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full 2] button switches the instrument to “MODE 2” (p. 227). The display changes as shown below, and the ATELIER switches to Image Control mode. Video Link System is ON. The VLINK function is turned on, and the VLINK icon appears in he main screen.

2. To cancel the V-LINK function, once again

hold down the Composer [Reset] button and press either the Upper Organ [Full 1] button or the Upper Organ [Full 2] button. If set to "MODE 1” [p. 227), holding down the Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full 1] button switches the V-LINK function off. If set to “MODE 2” (p. 227), holding down the Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full 2] button switches the V-LINK function of. KL J

Various Other Settings Do this carefully, because touching a location that's different Repositioning the Touch Screen from the one indicated for the pointer may make the displacement even worse. Be sure to touch the pointer If you've been using the Touch Screen for some time, the aceurately. IFthe following display appears, perform the pointer may be shified, making the ATELIER react incorrectly. touch panel position adjusiment once again. You should correct this displacement when necessary by performing calibration {repositioning). T. Touch <System> on the Main screen. Desmatelee ne The System screen appears. are incorrect.

2. inthe System screen, touch <Utility>.

The Utility screen appears. Ccese ] À display will ask for confirmation. To cancel the operation, touch <Cancel>. Æ. Touch <OK> on the screen.

5. Touch the points indicated on the touch screen.

ae) Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings You can restore the User memory to their original factory settings. This function is called “User Memory Reset.” (What is User Memory? à “User Memory” refers to an area inside the instrument where you can store the user rhythms you create and the performances you record. Rhythms and SMF music files saved on USB memory can also be copied to user memory (p. 97). The confirmation message appears on screen. User memory is quite useful, since anything you place there will be retained even while the power is turned off. A Reset User Memory OK? The following things are stored in User memory: + Songs you've registered in “Favorites” à Rhyhms En Lx | + Registration sets D. Touch <Cancel> to return to the System screen without resetting the user memory. Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

The user memory will be reset to the factory-set state. Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress Executing.. To reset only the User memory (p. 82) to its original factory

2. In the System screen, touch <Ufility> to open seHings, refer to p. 231. If you want to reset all settings to

the Utility screen. their factory-set state, refer to p. 27. ni 230

Various Other Settings

The confirmation message appears on screen. Restoring Al Settings Other Than the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings À Pare set 04? You can restore all of the settings other than the User memory {p. 82) to their original factory settings. Lancet] [x This function is called “Panel Reset.” T. Touch <System> on the Main screen. If you touch <Cancel>, the Panel Reset will not be The System screen appears performed, and you will return to the System screen.

The Panel Reset operation will begin, and the settings Will return to the factory-set condition. Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress! Executing.

2. In the System screen, touch <Ufility> to open )—

the Utility screen. To reset only the User memory (p. 82) to its original factory settings, refer to p. 230. If you want to reset all settings to their factory-set state, refer to p. 27. You can also use the following method to open the Panel Reset confirmation screen.

1. Touch <Quick Guide> on the Main screen, to

3. In the Utility screen, touch <Panel Reset>. The Panel Reset confirmation screen will appear.

IE AT-900_e.book 232 X—% 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#H43 Various Other Settings Formatting a USB Memory (Format) The process of preparing USB memory or floppy disks so that they can be used with the ATELIER is called ‘initialization” (formatting). In certain cases, particularly with floppy disks, the media is formatted for a specific type of device. Ifthe media format does not match the ATELIER's, you will not be able to use that media with the ATELIER. Connect the USB memory to the external memory connector I you want to initialize a floppy disk, connect your floppy disk drive (sold separately] to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the floppy disk. Touch <Registration> on the Main screen. Touch <go to Savez. The Registration Save screen appears. Touch < —}>< +}> to select the media. Choose “Ext Memory” if you want to initialize USB memory, or choose “Disk” if you want to initialize a floppy disk. Touch < > (Utility). The Utility screen appears. Touch <Format>. The Format screen appears. À Format ok? IF you touch <Cancel>, you will return to the Registration Save screen without formatting. Touch <OK> to start formatting. When the format is finished, the Registration Save screen returns. Never attempt to remove the USB memory until formatting is complete.

Displaying a Graphic at Power-up The ATELIER allows you to load a favorite graphic into internal memory, and have it be displayed when the power is turned on. Use your computer to create a graphic image file that meets the following critei Size 800 x 480 pixels Color 24 bit colors Format | image saved in BMP format 1-8 characters in length (lowercase is ok). A filename extension of “.BMP" must be added after the name. The following characters can be used to name an image. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPG@RST UVWXYZabcdefghijkimnop qrstuvwxyz0123456789#$ %&'(}-@-{}A 21 Name If you use a character that cannot be used in a name, it will be replaced by another character when displayed. Using your computer, save the image that you want to load into the ATELIER on external media. Connect the external media containing the image to the ATELIER. IF you're using USB memory, connect it to the external memory connector. If you're using a floppy disk, connect the separately purchased floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector. Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears. In the System screen, touch <Uïility>.

Various Other Settings

6. Touch <BMP Installer>. 9. Touch < —|>< +)> to select the media.

The BMP Installer screen appears. Choose “Ext Memory” to load an image from USB memory, or choose “Disk” to load an image from floppy disk. The destination will show the names of the images saved on the external media. 02:(Blank) 03:(Blank _ ss 10.Touch <E3> want to loa > to select the image that you to internal memory. MEMD You can touch <View> to verify the image. Display Explanation TT. Touch <OK>. Images stored in internal memory The image will be loaded. 01-03 | For numbers at which no image is saved, (Blank}” is shown. If an image is already stored at he load destination, the The image siored in he ATELIER will be following screen will appear. View | shown for a few seconds, allowing you to check the image. Load... Load an image from external media into internal memory. Clear... | Delete an image from internal memory. A overwrite OK? The ATELIER can store up to three images. If two or more s) images are stored in internal memory, those images will be displayed consecutively afler he power is turned on. [cena] Co |

7. In the screen, touch <01>-<03> to select the

destination at which the image is to be saved. To erase the currently loaded image, and load the new image < BMP Installer til | 1. Touch <OK>. Ot:Birthday.BNP 03:(Blank) [6 roc/riay To cancel image loading

Ifthe image cannot be loaded, the following screen will appear.

The following screen appears.

ae) Deleting an Image Stored in Internal Memory Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

4. In the screen, touch <01>—<03> to select the

image that you wish to delete. MEMD You can touch <View> to verify the image. MEMb Numbers for which “Blank” is shown have no image.

The following screen appears. À Giear BMP File OK? To cancel without deleting the image, touch <Cancel>.

The image will be deleted. ME Once the image has been deleted, the screen will indicate “Blank.”

À screen like the one below will appear, allowing you to specify a name for the folder. Copying Data from a Floppy Disk to USB Memory All songs and registration data saved on a floppy disk can be copied to USB memory. FOLDERO Sound/kBo| Rhythms and image data cannot be copied. +ongs and registrations inside folders will not be copied. If you want to copy this data, move the song or registration data out of the folder. T. Make preparations for the copy. Connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Memory connector. Into the floppy disk drive, insert the floppy disk containing the data you want to copy. IF you're copying all songs and registrations to USB memory, a folder will be created in the USB memory, and the data will be saved in this folder.

6. Touch the character select button (CEE)

to switch among uppercase/numbers. Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle Connect your USB memory to the external memory connector.

Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

The following screen appears. Al songs and registrations on the disk wil be copied to a newly created folder in external memory. Please enter a name for the folder. IF you decide to stop the data copy operation, touch <Cancel>.

through the available choices, like this: uppercase numbers — uppercase.. Touch the screen to specify the desired character. The following characters can be selected. ABCDEFGHIJKIMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ _0123456789 Del Deletes a character. Space) æ] + When you're done making the settings, touch <Ok>. The folder name has been assigned. Inserts a space (blank). Move the cursor [the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input] to left or right. The following screen appears. Duplication of music data for any purpose other than personal enjoyment without permission from the copyright owner is forbidden by law.

The data from floppy disk will be copied to USB memory. When the copy is completed, a message will indicate “Completed,” and you will return to the System screen. IFthe floppy disk drive or USB memory is not connected correclly, a screen like the following will appear. ges À The floppy disk or external memory is not connected correctly. Video-related Settings Specifying the Television Format Set the ATELIER's television format to match the television format of the television, video camera, or DVD player that is connected. Change this setting if the image is not correctly shown on the television, or if the image from your video camera or DVD player is not displayed correctly. Set this to the broadcast format used in your area. Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

The Video screen appears. DVD SideShow

The Video Option screen appears.

5. Touch the NTSC/PAL setting to switch between

“NTSC” and “PAL.” Setting NTSC, PAL NTSC and PAL Both of these are the names of color television broadcast standards. NTSC is used in North America and a number of other countries including Japan. PAL is used in many regions, including Europe and Asia.

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

| & AT-900_e.book 237 K—% 2007#Æ9A7H HA +FH8#439 Various Other Settings Selecting the Aspect Ratio of the Video Output This seing changes the proportional relationship between the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the image that is output from the ATELIER to the television or display connected to the Video Output [Video] jack. The ATELIER's display screen has a horizontal/vertical ratio of 16:9. Televisions and displays have screen sizes with a horizontal/vertical ratio of 4:3 or 16:9 [wide screen). You can't change the aspect ratio of the image that is output from the Video Output [RGB] connector to an external display or a television. If you're viewing images on a television or display connected to the Video Output [Video] jack, change this setting as appropriate for the aspect ratio of the television or display you've connected. Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

The Video screen appears. SideShow CE)

The Video Option screen appears. NTSC MIX al 8 SECONDS |

5. Touch the Aspect Ratio setting to switch

between “16:9” and “4:3.” Setting Descriptions 169 | Use this setting ifthe connected television or ‘ display has a screen aspect ratio of 16:9. 43 Use this setting ifthe connected television or display has a screen aspect ratio of 4:3.

This seting remains stored in memory even while power is MEMD turned off. © image is displayed correctly Aspect Ratio

O 4:3 Television Original image 16:9 16:9 Television X Image is distorted X Image is not completely visible

IFthe image is still not shown correcily even though you have adjusted the ATELIER's aspect ratio to match the television or display you've connected, please change the settings of the connected television or display.

5. Touch the Slide Show Type setting.

Selecting the Type of Slide Show You can specify how transitions between images are to occur when you play back a slide show (p. 265). Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

6. Touch <—}>< +)> to change the setting.

Descriptions One photo will simply fade-out while the next photo fades-in. The photo will be divided into blocks that change separately. The photo will switch using rapid movement and color combination. Scting SIMPLE BLOCK

3. Touch <Video>. POP

The Video screen appears.

Simple, block, and pop types will be combined. )— ESS

The Video Option screen appears.

. . 5. Touch the Slide Show Interval setting. Selecting the Interval at which Images Will Change You can specify the interval at which images will change when you play back a slide show (p. 265]. Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears.

6. Touch <—}>< +)> to change the setting.

Setting 5 SECONDS, 8 SECONDS, 12 SECONDS,

4 MEASURES, 6 MEASURES, 8 MEASURES

s of Jack and Connecto co | L/Mono R L/Mono Bass L/Mono R Camera RGB Video On Main Drums Output Input Video In Video Out Illumination [e] Mic MIDI _{1 Phones me Mic USB a (@) O G Min° * Max | 10 1 j 12 13 The functions of the jacks on the bottom of the keyboard are described below. PS Output Video Out & 7 NA T. Main L/Mono, R Jacks 6. RGB Connector > p. 245 These jacks can be connected to your audio system to You can connect an external display here to view enjoy more powerful sound. images from a video camera or DVD. IFthe Aux Out mode is set to “SEPARATE,” sounds other : than drums and bass will be output from these jack (p. 7+ Video Jack > p. 246 247). You can connect a television here to view images from a video camera or DVD.

2. Aux/Drums L/Mono, R Jacks

You can connect an external speaker or a reverb unit to 8. illumination Switch obtain a more spacious reverb. Press this switch to turn on the illumination. If you set Aux Out mode to "SEPARATE," the drum sound will be output from these jacks [p. 247]. 9+ Phones Jack » p. 25 Connect headphones here.

IF you set Aux Out mode to “SEPARATE,” the bass sound TO.Mic Volume Knob > p. 25 will be output from this jack (p. 247). This adjusts the volume when a microphone is connected. Input TT Mic Jack > p. 25 Connect microphone here.

4. Input L/Mono, R Jacks

Using these jacks, you can connect other sound generating devices or audio equipment and play sounds 12.MIDI Out/In Connectors -> p. 244 from ofher devices through the ATELIER's speaker. You can connect external MIDI devices to the ATELIER Video In and exchange performance data between them.

5. Camera Jack + p. 256 T3.USB Connector p. 242

À video camera or other device can be connected here. Used for connecting a computer to the ATELIER using a USB cable.

Connecting with External Device nnecting to Audio Equipment You can connect audio devices to play the sound of the ATELIER through the speakers of your audio system, or to *_ When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume record your performance on a tape recorder or olher level of equipment connected to he input jacks may be low. recording device. IF this happens, use connection cables that do not contain resistors. When connecting, please use an audio cable with a 7 à malfuncion and/or d lo speakers or oh standard phone plug, such as the PCS-100PW (sold À prevent morunellon anef or cemage 19 speakers Dr oner devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the separately). . . power on all devices before making any connections. Connecting Speakers to the ATELIER Turning Off the Power and Outputting Sounds 1. Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the speaker you're about to connect.

2. Turn off the connected speaker.

3 Turn off the ATELIER. Playing Sounds from Audio Equipment Through the ATELIER (de) CRREREELREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEET) Pi \ 2 & LM À L'on R Bass Main Aux/Drums a cup

Input [Line In) jack T Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the speaker you’re about to connect.

2. Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the

speaker. Lono À Camera RGB Input Video In video €

3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the

connection. p Stereo Set etc. &. Switch on the ATELIER. Output (Line Oui jack

5. Switch on the connected speaker.

T Turn the volume all the way down on the

6. Adjust the volume level on the ATELIER and the ATELIER and on the audio device you’re about

connected speaker. to connect. When you play the ATELIER's keyboard, the sound is played from the connected speakers.

Connecting with External Device

2. Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the

audio device. Connecting a Computer

3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the The following become possible once you connect a USB cable

connection. (available separately) between the USB connector located to the lower left of the ATELIER and the USB connector of your

4. Switch on the audio device. computer.

5. Switch on the ATELIER. + You can use the ATELIER to play sounds from SMF music

files played back with MIDI software.

6. Adjust the volume level on the ATELIER and the +_ By exchanging MIDI data with sequencer sofhware, you

audio device. can save songs recorded with the ATELIER to your The sounds from the connected audio device are played computer, and enjoy a variety of musical control and by the ATELIER. editing features. Turning Off the Power Connect the ATELIER to your computer as shown below. T Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the audio device you're about to connect. 2 Turn off the ATELIER.

3. Turn off the audio device.

Connecting an amp to produce sound [AT-900C) The rear panel of the AT-900C provides balanced [XLR] output jacks. You can connect these jacks to your amp or mixer to produce sound. This instrument is equipped with balanced [XLR] type jacks. Wiring diagrams for these jacks are shown below. Make connections after first checking the wiring diagrams of other equipment you intend to connect.

USB Cable *__Refer to the Roland website for system requirements. Roland website: http://www.roland.com/

l Connecting with External Device If connection to your computer is unsuccessful.… Making the Settings for the USB Driver PUR EE ET 7 Nermally, you don't need to install a driver in order to connect Normally, you don't need to install a driver in order to connect the ATELIER to your computer. However, if some problem the ATELIER to your computer. However, if some problem occurs, or if the performance is poor, using the Roland oceurs, or if the performance is poor, using the Roland original driver may solve the problem. criginal driver may solve the problem. For details on Specify the USB driver you want to use, and then install ihe downloading and installing the Roland original driver, referto jar the Roland website. Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. Roland website: http://www.roland.com/ The System screen appears. Specify the USB driver you want to use, and then install the . A driver. 2. Touch <S-<£Z- to display the USB Driver. (caution à *_ To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers CET cr or other devices, ahways tu down the volume, and ntr turn off the power on all devices before making any Te connections.

+ Only MIDI data can be transmitted using USB. —= + _ USB cables are not included. Consult your Roland (ES) dealer i you need to purchase. & Turn on the power to the ATELIER before starting up MIDI applications on the computer. Do not turn the ATELIER on or off while any MIDI application is running. . +1 Touch the USB Driver setting to switch between “GENERIC” and “ORIGINAL.” Each time you touch the USB Driver setting, it will alternate between “GENERIC” and “ORIGINAL.” Setting Descriptions Choose this if you want to use the standard USB driver that was included with your computer. Normally, you should use this mode. GENERIC Choose this if you want to use a USB driver downloaded from the Roland website. ORIGINAL Æ. Turn the ATELIER’s volume to the minimum level, switch off the power, then turn it back on again. soneq leueixa Lim Bupoauuos This seing remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

PS) & IE AT-900_e.book 244 K— 2007Æ9A7H &HA F8#43 & ||@ Connecting with External Device The ATELIER contains two sound generators: one sound Connecting MIDI Devices generator for its own keyboards and one GM2/GS sound generator (p. 280). Normally, musical data transmitted from By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging an external device to the MIDI In connector is sent to the performance data, you can control the performances on one GM2/GS sound generator, but you can also set the “MIDI IN device from ihe other. For instance, you can output sound from Mode” parameter (p. 223] so that he keyboard sound the other instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument. generator is controlled. What's MIDI? Making the Connections MIDI, short for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface,” was When connecting, turn on power to your various devices in developed as a standard for the exchange of performance the order specified. Failure to follow these steps in the order data between electronic instruments and computers. given could cause a malfunction and/or damage to The ATELIER is equipped with MIDI connectors to let it exchange performance data with external devices. These 1. Turn the volume all the way down on the connectors can be used to connect the ATELIER to an external ATELIER and on the device you're about to connect. speakers or other equipment. device for even greater versatility. About MIDI toi où Connectors 2. Switch off the power to the ATELIER and the The ATELIER has wo kinds of MIDI connectors. device you’re about to connect, Connecting these to the MIDI connectors on a MIDI instrument makes it possible for the two instruments to control each other. 3. Use a MIDI cable (sold separately] to connect de For instance, you can output sound from the other instrument the MIDI connectors to each other. & or switch tones on the other instrument. You should al + the MIDI send ch | ded. . QE RON ao see SRE EERNE 08 neeER Æ. Switch on the power to the ATELIER and the MIDI connected device. Adjust the volume level on the ATELIER and the gs connected device. Out In d MIDI Out Connector 6. You should also set the MIDI send channel as Connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI IN connector needed (p. 223]. with an optional MIDI cable. The notes played on the keyboard, movements of the Damper pedal, Expression data, data indicating that a Registration button, etc., was pressed will be transmitted to the external MIDI connector. The Solo voice will be transmitted only if the Solo [To Lower] button is ON. MIDI In Connector Connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI out connector with an optional MIDI cable. Performance messages from an external MIDI device are received here. These incoming messages may instruct the receiving MIDI instrument to play sounds or switch voices.

Display Cable {commercial available) Displays That Can Be Connected to This Instrument In general, a great many of the VGA monitors and multiscan monitors that are available on the market are compatible With this instrument. However, before you connect any monitor, make sure it meets the following specifications: Resolution 800 x 480 pixels Horizontal scan frequency | 31.5 kHz Vertical scan frequency 60 Hz Connector 3-row, 15-pin D-Sub type Signal Analog Confirm that the display to be used is compatible with the frequencies mentioned above. Using a display that is not compatible with the above frequencies may result in incorrect image output when images move, and in certain cases may even damage the display.

External Display Making the Connections To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections TL Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the display to be connected (p. 24).

2. Connect your display to the ATELIER.

Use display cable (sold separately] to connect the display to the Video Out [RGB] jack on the ATELIER.

3. Switch on the ATELIER (p. 24).

4. Switch on the connected display.

WE For more on handling the external display, refer to your display's owner's manual.

Connecting with External Device Connecting a Television ra RGB Video on in Video où) llumination Ci. Video Cable {commercial available) 7 — FN & Television @ Making the Connections Switching Off Your Television or To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or ofher External Display devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections You must turn off the power of the lelevision or external ; display in the following order. Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the "mo po T. Minimize the volume of the ATELIER (p. 24). television to be connected (p. 24).

2. Connect your television to the ATELIER. 2. Switch off the connected television or display.

Use a video cable {sold separately] to connect the . ATELIER Video Out [Video] jack with the television's 3. Switch off the ATELIER (p. 24). video input jack.

3. Switch on the ATELIER (p. 24).

4. Switch on the connected display.

5. (As necessary) Specify the television output

6. Specify the aspect ratio (ratio between width

and heighi) for your television (p. 237).

Connecting with External Device Changing the settings when Switching the Aux Out Mode COUTURE OR ESSOR 1. rouch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears. The ATELIER has an Aux/Drums Output jack and Bass Output jack on the bottom of the instrument. By using this Aux/Drums Output jack to connect external 2. Touch <fS-<ŒZ- to display the Aux Out speakers or audio set, you can sound the reverb Mode. {reverberation] from the speakers. An external reverb unit can also be connected and used to apply reverb. 3. Touch the Aux Out Mode seing. By making connections to the Aux/Drums Output jacks or Bass Output jack, you can output the drums or bass sounds separately. This is convenient when you've connected the ATELIER to a mixer so that the overall volume balance can be adjusted on the mixer. Switching the Aux Out On/OFF Te Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears. È 4. Touch < —}>< +}> to change the setting. ° _—_. Satin Eee D— Play the RSS reverb sound from lhe external —— man | — IENCE | The reverb sound applied by the ATELIER will be ouput Connect an external reverb processor and TO use it to apply the desired reverb. EFFECTOR | The direct sound is output for applying reverb.

2. Touch <fS-<Æ3- to display the Aux Out.

Use a connected mixer to adjust the volume balance SEPARATE | Boss, drums, and other sounds will be output

3. Touch the Aux Out setting to switch between

4ON” and “OFF.” separately. Each time you touch the Aux Out setting, it will alternate The accompaniment and rhythm will be heard between “ON” and "OFF." from external speakers, creating the sensation that you're playing with an orchestra . The sounds you play on the keyboard will be

4. Touch <Exit-. ENSEMBLE | hard from the ATELIER's own speakers, and

the accompaniment will be heard from the speakers that are connected to the Aux/ Drums Output connector. soneq leueixa Lim Bupoauuos

ED You can change the depth of Reverb for each part (p. 152]. This seing remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

IE AT-900_e.book 248 K— 2007#9A7H &HA F8#43 Connecting with External Device A Setup for a Small Hall or Home Aux Out : ON Speakers are placed at the back to produce the RSS reverb sound. Aux Out Mode: AMBIENCE This setup lets you enjoy the sensation of being enveloped by sound, even while in your own living room. AT-900/AT-900C [ 7 D melon [7] root ape

(Aux/ Drum Output Rear Speaker L_f 7 _Rear Speaker R Powered Speaker Powered Speaker A Setup for a Mid-sized Hall Aux Out : ON Speakers are placed in front and in the back to produce the RSS reverb sound. Aux Out Mode: AMBIENCE AT-900/AT-900€ [| Front Speaker L / L | Front Speaker R Danse ni PTT g sd (Main Output) (Aux/Drum Output Amplifier Rear Speaker L Rear Speaker R Amplifier

CIE AT-900_e.book 249 K— 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#434 Connecting with External Device Settings for Using an External Reverb Processor You can use an external reverb processor to apply reverb to the ATELIER's sound. Aux Out : ON Aux Out Mode: TO EFFECTOR AT-900/AT-900C PF 1 Front Speaker L FE Front Speaker R (Main Output) (Aux/Drum Output = 1 1 Amplifier As) 7" \ 2 & External Reverb Device

Rear Speaker L Rear Speaker R £

IE AT-900_e.book 250 K— 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#43 Connecting with External Device A Setup for a Recital Bass, drums, and other sounds are output separately, and a mixer is used to adjust the volume balance. Aux Out : ON Aux Out Mode: SEPARATE AT-900/AT-900C [ 1

pti = RUE (Main Output FBess Output JT (aux Drum Output) Speaker L nl = es ie Mixer Es we = |) Amplifier @ Jk Speaker R A Setup for Enjoying Ensemble Performance By producing the accompaniment and rhythm from external speakers, you can enjoy the sensation of performing together with an orchestra. AT-900/AT-900C F | Aux Out : ON Aux Out Mode: ENSEMBLE ETUI

Powered Speaker Powered Speaker

PS) & IE AT-900_e.book 251 X— 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#439 & ||@ Connecting with External Device Using the Remote You can use the included remote control to conveniently play/stop a song or to select songs. You can also use the remote to switch the image of the external display or For details on how the remote television, or assign frequently used functions to the remote buttons. controls buttons function, refer to “Remote Control Buttons” (p. 253] Installing Batteries in the Remote Install the included batteries (two) into the remote control unit. 1 + Remote (Rear) 2. 3.

7. Slide the cover located on the rear of the remote to open it.

2. Insert the two AA batteries in the orientation shown on the remote. Be sure to observe the correct

polarity (+, + for each battery.

3. Slide the cover closed.

CIE AT-900_e.book 252% 2007Æ9A7H &HA F8#43 Connecting with External Device Using the Remote When using the remote, point it toward the remote sensor on the ATELIER, and stay within the allowable operating range described below. F 7 ESS | ssl mr Z KL] L Es EL TC TC TI €) D | Remote Sensor

LG np =0 Eco ci eut Operating range for the remote Distance: 4 meters or less Angle: 40 degrees or less (to left or right) Cautions when using the remote You can't operate two or more of the remote’s buttons simultaneously. Even if the remote is within the operating range, it may not work if there are obstacles between it and the remote sensor, or if the angle is poor. Malfunctions may occur if you use the remote near a device that produces infrared light, or if you use another infrared remote control nearby. The battery life will depend on the conditions of use. The operating range Will decrease as the batteries run down. Replace the batteries if this occurs. +_lFyou won't be using the remote for an extended period, remove the batteries. If a strong light such as a spotlight strikes the remote sensor, the remote control may respond sluggishly. | 252

Connecting with External Device Remote Control Buttons You can use the buttons of the remote control to perform the following functions. CANGEL UN) VDEO TOME sonG INTERNAL è EXTERNAL

Button name Explanation (©) [FJECT] button If a CD drive is connected, this ejects the CD or opens/closes the tray. Adijusts the depth of mic echo. ©) [VOCAI] button Each time you press the button, the mic echo depth will change.

Switches the image shown in the connected external display or television. Images from a video camera, digital camera, DVD player, or video- enabled audio player connected to the ATELIER can be shown on an external display or television. You can also connect a CD drive and play @ [VIDEO] button back VIMA TUNES to view an appropriate slide show {p. 265] while listening to the song. The Video screen is shown in the ATELIER's display. Camera -> DVD > Ext In (External Input) —> Slide Show -+ Off [Video function is turned off) + Camera … eaneq IEuiexa Um Bunoeuuo

Connecting with External Device Button name Explanation © ICANCEL button If you have used the [VOCAL button, [MDEO] button, or [TONE] button to change the settings, this will return the settings to their factory-set state. O) [ONE] button The reverb depth will change each time you press the button. DONC INTERNAU | The demo screen vil be displayed. utton SONG [FAVORITES] Selects songs from “Favorites.” button Selects songs from an external media [USB memory or floppy disk). ©) IF external media is connected both to the external memory connector and to the Ext Drive connector, pressing this button toggles you between these SONG [EXTERNAL] two sources of media. In this case, “Ext Memoryl" is indicated for the button external media connected to the external media connector, and “Ext Memory2" is indicated for the external media connected to the Ext Drive connector. *_ This button won't work if no external media is connected. LH ] button Pressing the [ H@-@ ] button selects the preceding song. Plays/stops the song. Press the remote [ ] button to toggle the song between playing and stopped. (©) Læ/1 ] button When you press the remote [ æ/If ] button, songs will play back @) consecutively from the selected song. All songs in the selected location Oo) ù favorites or external media] will play back in succession. Playback will T stop when you press the remote [ /IN ] button once again. Læ21 ] bution Press the [ m1 ] button to select the next song. VOLUME [MUTE] button | Temporarily mutes all sounds. Adijust the volume of the keyboard and song. VOLUME f] [+] buttons | Pressing the VOLUME [] button decreases the volume, and pressing the VOLUME [+] button increases the volume. Executes the function you've assigned to this button. [FUNC 1] button You can change the function that's assigned to the button {p. 227). With the factory settings, “Lyrics” is assigned to this button. (Q) Executes the function you've assigned to this button. [FUNC 2] button You can change the function that's assigned to this button [p. 227). With the factory settings, "Melody Mute” is assigned to this button. Adijust the tempo of the song. Pressing the TEMPO [] button slows down the tempo, and pressing the TEMPO El [4] buttons | TEMPO [4] button speeds up the tempo. *_ You can't change the tempo of a music CD. Change the key of the song that's playing. KEY CTRL (key control) | Pressing the KEY CTRL [ button will lower the key, and pressing the KEY @ E [+] buttons CTRL [+] button will raise the key. » Play Transpose (p. 218)

| & AT-900_e.book 255 K—% 2007#9A7H HA +FH8#439 & ||@ Enjoying Music and Video You can connect an external display or television to the ATELIER, and use itto view images from a device connected to the ATELIER. You can also connect a CD drive (commercially available) and play back VIMA TUNES (sold separately]. While playing a VIMA TUNES song, you can VIMA TUNES is a Roland use the external display or television to view a slide show suitable for the specification for music files that character of the song, or play along using recommended tones. contains image and lyric data, allowing you to enjoy songs with lyrics and images simultaneously. When data bearing the “VIMA TUNES" Video Screen logo is played back on a RRRLLEEEEREEEEEEEEEE EEE CEREE EEE EEE EUR EREEE De sens In the System Utility screen, touch <Video> to access the “Video screen” logo, lyrics can be shown on shown below. the screen of a connected external display or television, leing you enjoy karaoke or Switches the image shown in the waich a slide show. external display or television. Switches the display of Iyrics on/off. Opens a screen with video-related settings. VIMA TUNES Screen In the Video screen, touch <VIMA TUNES> to access the “VIMA TUNES screen” shown below. BB VIMA TU In the M Videc W Ly Tenor Sax2 Vibraphone Oboe Sounds appropriate for the currently Change the key of the song thats playing playing VIMA TUNES song will be selected automatically.

IE AT-900_e.book 256 X—% 2007#9A7H &HA F8#43 Enjoying Music and Video Performing with a Background Image from a Video Camera

The image from your video camera can be shown on an external display or a television connected to the ATELIER. In the large external screen, you show yourself performing in real time, or show a video you've taken of your family for everyone to enjoy. Connect your video camera. If you want to connect a video camera, connect it to the Camera In connector located in the jack panel on the left of the ATELIER's bottom surface. Ô © [] Video In Video Out llumination  ) Visual >) For details, refer to the owner's manual of your video camera. Video camera cables can differ depending on the model. Check the shape of the connector on the ATELIER and on your video camera, and make sure you have the correct type of cable when making connections. Make sure that the video camera you're connecting matches the television format selected on the ATELIER. For details on setting the television format of your video camera, refer to the owner's manual for your video camera. For details on setting the ATELIER's television format, refer to “Specifying the Television Format” {p. 236] The AT-900C's stand has screw holes for fastening the camera stand.

2. Turn on the video function.

Press the [Camera] button so it's lit. I you press the [Video Monitor] button located below the display, the ATELIER's display will show the same image as Video Input DVD Ext In the external display or ) ileviion This à @ comenient way for you to monitor the image that's shown in the . external display or television

3. Prepare your video camera.

Turn on the power of your video camera. The image that's being captured or played back by your video camera will appear on the external display or television connected to the ATELIER. For details, refer to the owner's lof id À Perform or sing along with the background image from your video camera. manual of your video camera Turning Off the Video Function

4. Press the lit [Camera] button, turning off its illumination. ISME music fles with Iyrics is

If all of the video function select buttons are not lighted, the television or external playing back, you can touch display will show the MUSIC ATELIER logo (p. 262]. <lyrics> on the Video screen to display the song lyrics over the background image from the As) æ

IE AT-900_e.book 258 X— 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#43 Enjoying Music and Video Performing with a Bac

nd Image from a D You can connect your DVD player and use an external display or a television connected to the ATELIER to show the image from the DVD player while listening to the music or narration through the ATELIER's speakers. You can also temporarily mute the DVD's sound on the ATELIER and perform to the DVD's background video, or decrease the melody portion and sing the melody yourself. Turn the DVD Player In [Volume] knob all the way to the right so that the volume is minimized. Connect your DVD player. If you want to connect your DVD player and display its video image, connect it to the DVD Player In connector of he ATELIER's. If you want to hear the audio from the DVD player, connect your DVD player's audio output jacks of the ATELIER. Video jack Yellow Volume DVD Playerin

AUDIO L/R jacks Turn on the video function. Press the video function select [DVD] button so it's lit. Video Input For details, refer to the owner's manual of your DVD player. For the AT-900C, detach the cover from the rear panel (p. 26). DVD player cables can differ depending on the model. Check the shape of the connector on the ATELIER, and make sure you have the correct type of cable when making connections. You can also connect your DVD player to the ATELIER's Camera connector or Ext In connector and view the video from your DVD player on the external display or television Make sure that the DVD player you're connecting matches the television format selected on the ATELIER For details on setting the television format of your DVD player, refer to the owner's manual for your DVD player For details on setting the ATELIER's television format, refer to “Specifying the Television Format” {p. 236]

Enjoying Music and Video

4. Play back your DVD player.

The external display or television connected to the ATELIER will show the video being For details, refer to the owners played by the DVD player. The audio from the DVD player will be played back through manual of yeur DVD player. the ATELIERS speakers.

5. Adjust the DVD volume.

To adjust the volume of the DVD, turn the DVD Player In [Volume] knob of the ATELIER. If you turn the DVD Player In [Volume] all the way toward the right, there will be no sound from the DVD. If you press the [Video Monitor] button located below the display, the ATELIER’ display will show the same image as the external display or television. This is a convenient way for you to monitor the image that's shown in the Volume DVD Playerin external display or television

6. To minimize the sound of the vocal on the DVD, proceed as

follows. T. Touch <System> on the Main screen.

You can change the pitch ofthe DVD players sound. For

2. Touch <Uiility> on the System screen. details, efer to “Transposing

the Song to a Comfortable Key

This will decrease the vocal (melody) portion of the music from the DVD, allowing you to sing or play it yourself. Turning Off the Video Function

7. Press the lit [DVD] button to turn off its illumination.

If all of the video function select buttons are not lighted, the television or external display will show the MUSIC ATELIER logo (p. 262]. *_IFyou connect a device {such as a video camera] that contains a microphone to the ATELIER's DVD Player In connector, acoustic feedback {a whine or shriek) may oceur depending on the position of your video camera relative to the speakers. If this occurs, take the following actions. oepiA pue oisniy Buléolua + Change the orientation of the video camera + Move the video camera away from the speakers + Lower the volume

Enjoying Music and Video Enjoying Powerful Sound and Big-screen Playback from Your Portable Audio/Video Player If your portable audio player has video capability, you can connect it so the video is shown on the external display or television and the music is heard from the ATELIER's speakers. 1: Set the [Master Volume] slider to Min so that the volume is minimized.

2. Connect your portable audio/video player. Far dci, refer to 1he owners

When connecting your portable audio/video player, connect it to the ATELIER's Ext In manual of your portable audio (Video, L, R] jacks. Use the type of jacks that are appropriate for the cables you're player. using.

Portable audio player with video functionality Make sure that the portable audio player you're connecting matches the television format selected on the ATELIER. For details on setting the television format of your portable audio player, refer to the owner's manual for portable audio player For details on setting the

3. Turn on the video function. ATELIER à television format,

refer to “Specifying the Press the video function select [Ext In] button so it's lit. Television Format”{p. 236) Video Input Camera DVD

Enjoying Music and Video

Play back your portable audio/video player. The external display or television connected to the ATELIER will show the image from your portable audio/video player. The sound from your player will be heard from the ATELIER's speckers. Turn the [Master Volumel slider to adjust the volume. To minimize the sound of the vocal on the portable audio/ video player, proceed as follows. T. Touch <System> on the Main screen.

This will decrease the vocal [melody) portion of the music from the portable audio player, allowing you to sing or play it yourself. Turning Off the Video Function Press the lit [Ext In] button to turn off its illumination. If all of the video function select buttons are not lighted, the television or external display will show the MUSIC ATELIER logo (p. 262]. For details, refer to the owner's manual of your portable audio player If you press the [Video Monitor] button located below the display, the ATELIER’ display will show the same image as the external display or television. This is a convenient way for you to monitor the image that's shown in the external display or television You can change the pitch ofthe portable audio/video player's sound. For details, refer to “Transposing the Song to a Comfortable Key for Singing”{p. 269).

ed see NUIT Enjoying Music and Video CTI

Freely Switching Between Images You can connect various video devices to the ATELIER, and then use the video function select buttons on the ATELIER's panel to freely control the image that's shown on the external display or television. Video Function Select Buttons This refers to the following buttons. Video Input [Camera] button Camera DVD Ext In [DVD] button [ni (mil mi) [Ext In] button T. Connect a variety of video devices to the ATELIER. Connecting a video camera -» p. 256 Connecting a DVD player + p. 258 Connecting a portable audio/video player > p. 260 6; : : . : ‘6: Ÿ 2. Press the video function select buttons to switch the image Ÿ shown in the external display or television. Button Function Page Switches to the image from the device connected to You can also switch the image Camera the Camera In connector. p.256 by touching the video function select buttons in the Video Switches to the image from the device connected to p. 258 screen or the VIMA TUNES the DVD Player In connector. DvD screen (p. 255) Switches to the image from the device connected to Ext In x the Ext In connector. p. 260 Turning off the Video function 1: Press video function select buttons to extinguish the indicators for all of the buttons. If all of the video select buttons are extinguished, the image from the video device connected to the ATELIER will not be displayed. The television or external display will show the MUSIC ATELIER logo.

Enjoying Music and Video Enjoying VIMA TUNES Songs Listening to a VIMA TUNES Song You can connect a CD drive (commercially available) and play back VIMA TUNES (sold separately]. While playing a VIMA TUNES song, you can use the external display or television to view a slide show suitable for the character of the song, or play along using recommended tones. T. Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the VIMA TUNES disc into the CD drive.

2. Touch <System> on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

The VIMA TUNES screen appears. UNES n | cemers JN_Do ext }

5. Touch <#1|><»>|> to select the song you want to play.

You can also press the panel's [Song] button and choose a VIMA TUNES song from Song Select screen. H will take a certain amount of time until VIMA TÜNES can be selected.

6. Touch < >/s|> to start playing back the song.

You can touch Play Transpose < —]><|+]> to change the key of the song. When you touch Melody <Mute> in the screen, the melody will be muted. You can mute the melody, and play the melody yourself. When you touch Melody <Guide> in the screen, the volume of the melody will be lowered. You can leave the melody playing at a lowered volume and play along until you've learned the melody. Since you will still be able to hear the melody, you can use it as a guide during practice.

7. Touch <#/s}|> to stop playing back the song.

ÉRe LE] Enjoying Music and Video

Displaying a Slide Show while the Song Plays While playing back a VIMA CD-ROM [VIMA TUNES), you can view a slide show of images that match the mood of the song. Songs on a CD-ROM created for VIMA [VIMA TUNES) contain slide show images suitable for those songs, making it easy for you to enjoy a slide show without having to prepare your own images (photos). T. Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the VIMA TUNES disc into the CD drive.

2. Touch <System> on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

The VIMA TUNES screen appears. You can also press the panels [Song] button and choose a _ VIMA TUNES song from Song UNES n È bl Select screen. CNETSIETS

H will take a certain amount of time until VIMA TÜNES can be selected.

5. Touch <Slide Show> so it's lit.

6. Touch < #<|><1»>}> to select the song you want to play.

7. Touch <rn}> to start playing back the song.

A slide show suitable for the character of the song will be shown on the external IF you press the [Video Monitor] display or television connected to the ATELIER. button located below the display, the ATELIER's display will show the same image as

8. Touch <rn}> to stop playing back the song.

shown on your external display or television. You can view the ATELIER's screen to check the image that's shown on your external display or television.

Enjoying Music and Video Performing with Sounds that Match the Song (Recommended Tones) When playing along on the keyboard while listening to a CD-ROM made for the VIMA [VIMA TUNES), this function lets you play using instrumental sounds that are appropriate for the atmosphere of the selected song. IF you select a song from a CD-ROM created for VIMA [VIMA TUNES), three recommended tones will automatically be selected in the VIMA TUNES screen. You can use these three sounds to perform sounds that will match the character of that song. When you want to select a song from a CD-ROM made for the VIMA (VIMA TUNES), insert the CD-ROM into the CD drive. Select the song of VIMA CD-ROM (p. 268). Touch <System> on the Main screen. The System screen appears. Touch <Utility>. Touch <VIMA TUNES>. The VIMA TUNES screen appears. UNES nt Video Ltmra 0 Noir) Melody

Recommended In SMF Vibraphone Oboe Main The three recommended tones are shown in the lower part of the screen. Touch one of the recommended tones in the screen to select a tone. Touch < >/=/> to start playing back the song. Play along with the song. The tones you play will be suitable for the character of the song. Touch <*/2/> to stop playing back the song.

Fe MNT PE TTET Enjoying Music and Video Home a CT] ae) Listening to Songs from Music CD You can connect a CD drive to the ATELIER and use it to play music CDs. This lets you perform or sing along with the backing of a music CD. 1: Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector, and insert the music CD into the CD drive. Vou can’ copy music CD songs to “Favorites.”

2. Press the [Song] button.

The Song Select screen appears. H will take a certain amount of time until a music CD can be Ces 2 selected. 03:Track 3 RO O4:Track 4 O5:Track 5

4. You can also play or stop the

music data by touching <Play> 5 or <Stop> in the Rec/Play . screen, and you can touch <Bwd> or <Fwd> to rewind or

6. Touch <CIES- (I) to stop playing back the song. fosHorward the playback.

À à CIE AT-900_e.book 269 K— 2007#9A7H &HA F8#43 S Ï Enjoying Music and Video Enjoying Karaoke with a Music CD (Center Cancel) You can minimize the vocal sounds of a commercially available music CD, and sing the vocal part yourself. This is a convenient way to enjoy karaoke or For some songs, the vocal practice soloing with a favorite music CD. sound may not be eliminated You can also minimize the vocal sounds of a song from a DVD or a portable completely. audio player. 1: Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector. EE . . . IF you want to sing along with a

2. Insert the music CD you want to use into the CD drive, and song on DVD or a portable

select the song you want to sing (p. 268). audio player, connect your DVD player (p. 258] or portable audio player (p. 260).

3. Display the VIMA TUNES screen. IF you touch Melody <Mute> in

the VIMA TUNES screen while playing a DVD or a song on

4. Touch the Melody <Mute> on the screen. your portable audio player, the

The Center Cancel function is active. sounds such as the melody or vocal will be diminished

5. Touch <rn}> to start playing back the song.

When you play back the song, the sound of the melody or vocal will be minimized.

This lets you perform the melody portion yourself. Transposing the Song to a Comfortable Key for Singing You can transpose the song to a key that is more comfortable for you to sing. I you or someone else will be singing along with a song, you can change the key of the song so it's appropriate for the singer’s range. You can transpose the key not only of a music CD, but also of the sound from a portable audio player or DVD player. 1: Touch Playback Transpose < _—}>< +}> on the VIMA Tunes screen. Each time you touch Play Transpose < —}> < +}>, the key is changed by one semitone. Touch < => to lower the key, or touch < +]> to raise the key. This can be set in a range of-6-0-5 [semitone steps]. The VIMA TUNES screen shows the value you've specified. oepiA pue oisniy Buléolua

2. HF you touch Playback Transpose < —}>< +}> to select “0,” IFyou select a different song,

Key Control will be turned off. the playback transpose settings Will return to their factory-set state.

IE AT-900_e.book 270 K— 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#43 Troubleshooting IFthe ATELIER does not function in the way you except, first check the following chart. IFthis does not resolve the problem, consult your dealer or a nearby Roland Service Station. Problem Check Solution Page When you press the [Power Onl | Le cord is not connected correctly. | Connect the power cord correctly. p. 23 switch, the power doesn't come on The ATELIER uses a liquid-crystal Nothing appears on screen Screen, so text may not be displayed This is not a malfunction. = when the ambient temperature is below freezing. It appears as though there are This is due to the naîure of a liquid : | . PE crystal display, and is not a This is not a malfunction. = vertical stripes in the screen . malfunction. IF the [Video Monitor] button is lit, the ATELIER's display will show the same Can't view the main screen The [Video Monitor] button is lit. image as the device connected to the | p. 18 ATELIER. Press the [Video Monitor] button so it's turned off. Bouncing Ball is not shown The Bouncing Ball display is turned off. ne the Main Bouncing Bal setting p- 225 Could the Remote function be turned offe Turn . Remote control does not work IFthe Remote function is turned off, Refer 1 Turing the Remote function p.227 : on/off. data from the remote control will not be received. The device connected to the Input | Could you be using a connection cable | Use a connection cable that does not _ jack is not loud enough that contains a resistor? contain a resistor. The volume level of the instrument | Could you be using a connection cable | Use a connection cable that does not ° , à , ° p.241 connected to ATELIER is too low. | that contains a resistor? contain a resistor. Could you be using USB memory not _ | W£Sannot guarantee operation ï you're using USB memory notmadeby | --- . made by Roland? Can't read/write USB memory Roland. The external memory seing is Change the external memory setting. p. 226 incorrect. IFthere is a cell phone nearby, you may hear noise from the ATELIER when an incoming call or outgoing call oceurs, or during a conversation. Noise is heard in the sound Keep the phone as far away as possible, or turn off its power.

IE AT-900_e.book 271 X—% 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#43 Troubleshooting Problem Check Solution Page The [Master Volume] slider is set too Turn the [Master Volume] knob toward 24 low. “Max.” P- Headphones are connected. When you connect the headphones, If you want sound to be output from the 25 the sound is heard only through the | speakers, disconnect the headphones. | P* headphones. The plug is still plugged into the Disconnect the plug from the 25 No sound is heard headphone jack. headphone jack. P- The volume is set too low on the Level | Press the Level [AJ[W] buttons to raise 72 [A] [w] buttons. the volume. P- The volume is set too low on the ; Expression Pedal. Advance the expression pedal. p.136 You do not have a Voice selected. Voices that have their button indicator | Press a voice button to select a voice. | p.47 lit can be played. No sound is heard Dr /SE are selected for the Lower Turn the Drums/SFX off or play keys to eyboard, but you are playing a key to . p.76 1by the Lower keyboard) . which drums sounds are assigned. which no drum sound is assigned. “Percussion Set 3” has been selected . for the Upper keyboard. . No sound is heard n . n For the upper keyboard, select a voice When "Percussion Set 3” is selected, u n p.49 1by the Upper keyboard) other than “Percussion Set 3. some keys may have no sound assigned to them. No sound is heard . Use the pedal cable to connect the (by the pedalboard) Pedal cord is not connected correcily. pedal correct. p. 20 No sound is heard (when external | The power of the connected external Use the correct procedure 1o turn on p.241 : ec the power of the connected external - devices are connected) devices is not turned on. d levices. p. 247 The damper pedal affecis only the You can change the settings so that the Lower keyboard and Upper keyboard. d dal aff lamper pedal affects the Upper p.212 The damper pedal does not affect the Keyboard Damper Pedal does not operate Bass pedalboard. eyboard. The damper pedal does not affect the | 5 ta malfunction. _ Solo voice. The function of the Expression Pedal Set the expression pedal function Expression Pedal does not during recording or the function during | during recording to “PEDAL,” and an operate playback has been set to during playback to “PEDAL” or P-

"COMPOSER." PÉDAL+COMPOSER.”

IF "Regist Shift” (change Registrations) Can't use the function assigned to 5 RIGHT, LEFT," a RIGHT + Load mon: an . Next," the foot switch will be Turn "Regist Shift” off. p- 135 the foot switch . Por dedicated to switching the Registration. When the human voice “Jazz Sat” The setting of “Initial Touch" is turned is selected, playing dynamics do g Turn “initial Touch" on. p.210 not change the sound OFF. Rotary effect is not be applied Some sounds do not allow the rotary effect to be applied. This is not a malfunction. Chorus effect does not apply Some sounds do not allow the chorus effect to be applied. This is not a malfunction.

Troubleshooting IE AT-900_e.book 272% 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#43 Problem Check Solution Page : Turn “Chord Hold” on. When you release your fingers A | : The Automatic Accompaniment will from keys in the Lower keyboard | hil hord. 1 Chord while Automatic Accompaniment play while you press a chord. IF Chor . Chord Hold is at OFF. Hold is turned ON, the Automatic p.214 and Rhythm are playing, the . il : I Rhythm performance only Accompaniment will continue playing . Pl : with the Rhythm even when you take remains p'aying your hand off of the Lower keyboard. When you release your fingers | : : from keys in the Lower keyboard, The Lower Voice [Hold] button is at Press the Lower Voice [Hold] button to p.80 . k ON. turn it off (dark). the notes continue sounding Even though you press only one | Harmony Intelligence is at ON. Turn “Harmony Intelligence" off. p- 138 key, a multiple number of notes u _ ; sound Chord Intelligence is tumed ON. Turn “Chord Intelligence” off. p. 90 This is not a malfunction. Sounds produced when youtake | You have selected a “Marimba Tremi_ | YOU sect a “Marimba Treml' or jour finger off a key or “Banjo Treml” sound Banjo Treml” sound, a sound will also DT L ° be produced when you take your finger off the key. The keys for a chord were not pressed | Either turn on the Chord Intelligence 90 simultaneously. function, or play the chord correctly. | P° When Chord Intelligence is OFF, the | Either turn on the Chord Intelligence : : : p. 90 chord is not being pressed correctly. function, or play the chord correcily. Automatic Accompaniment When performance data from a device sounds odd other than the ATELIER is being played together with the Automatic This is not Ifuncti Le Accompaniment, the Automatic 151 noi a matundtion. Accompaniment may not be sounded correctly. When performance data from a device other than the ATELIER is being played together with the Automatic : Le Rhythm sounds odd Accompaniment, the Rhythm This is not a malfunction. performance may not be sounded correctly. Simultaneously press the Transpose [+ Transpose is in effect [+] buttons to cancel the transposition 130 P : {the Transpose [][+] buttons’ indicators | P- will go out). Pitch is off The tuning is incorrect. Adljust the standard pitch. p- 221 While set for an octave shift, you are playing keys beyond the Adjust the Octave Shift setting. p.74 recommended range. This does not indicate a malfunction.

IE AT-900_e.book 273 X— 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#43 Troubleshooting Problem Check Solution Page IF you wish lo erase a previously. recorded track and then re-record, Press the track button for the desired press the track button for the desired | track to make that button indicator p.177 track to make that button blink before | blink before you begin recording. un | you begin recording. Recording is not possible f F au IFyou wish to erase a previously- On Rec/Play screen, touch the track recorded track and then re-record, button for the desired track to make touch the track button for the track you . h p.177 that button indicator blink before you want to record in the Rec/Play screen, : . à begin recording. stopping the button from flashing. Any performance that has been À performance cannot be restored The recorded performance has Y it dis deleted wh once it's been deleted, so be sure to disappeared recorded is deleted when he powerto | on a floppy disk before you turn | P° 180 the unit is turned off. PPY Y off the power. The bass note of the Automatic When a voice is selected for the Pedal : | . Bass part, the bass of the Automatic This is not a malfunction. = Accompaniment does not sound . Accompaniment will not sound. . The Computer switch is not set to Set the Computer switch to "MIDI" | p.244 MIDI messages received at MIDI In | “MIDI” position. are not sounded The Computer switch was set to "MIDI" | Turn off the power, and then turn the 244 after the power was turned on. power on once again. P- The Part Balance volume of each part | Press the Part Balance button to lower 72 is too high. the volume. P- The Reverb volume has been rase” À Ep lower ho Reverb volume, or | p.72 Sound is distorted / cracked Wen Me Vo me of eaen Part Paianee À dis the Part Balance of each part. | p. 150 button is already raised. The [Master Volume] slider has been | Lip [Master Volume] sliderto lower used to raise the overall volume the overall volume p.24 excessively. : Some keys [of certain keyboard You are playing notes outside he This is not a malfunction. Le parts) sound strange recommended range of the voice. The Rhythm does not change The settings at which Registrations are | Set the timing at which the arranger 109 when you press the Registration | recalled [Registration Arranger settings are called up (Registration P- 217 buttons Update] has been set to "DELAYED.” | Arranger Update] to "INSTANT." P- When recording is performed The volume changes during repeatedly while changing the Part If you wish to get rid of the volume layback of performance data Balance volume, the previously- changes, use the Erase function to p- 193 pry P recorded Part Balance data remains in | delete the Part Balance data. the Control track. The Pedal [To Lower] button or the Bass is heard even though you are Lass Sphl piton is ON. : . In the Pegol part, press he Pedel [To p. 161 ot playing the Bass Pedalboard When the Pedal [To Lower] button is | Lower] button or [Bass Split] button to P. 163 not P'ayng ON, the Bass will be sounded by the | turn the button off [dark]. + Lower keyboard. When playing the same sound in no Set the initial touch settings of the the Upper keyboard and Lower On one of the keyboard, “Initial Upper keyboard and the Lower p.210 keyboard, the volume is different Touch" is turned ON. keyboard to both On, or both Of. Lower keyboard cannot be heard The Lower keyboard will not produce sound while an Intro or Ending is being played. This is not a malfunction.

Troubleshooting IE AT-900_e.book 274 2007Æ9A7H &HA F8#43 Problem Check Solution Page IF you layer the same type of sound [for example, Strings 1 and Strings $), or | Lo ie loyering sounds of ihe same play an octave-shifted organ sound, : ; on | type (e.g., Strings 1 and Strings 5). : the timing at which you play a note or / : The sound is not played correctly Le. Alternatively, you are playing an --- the phase relationship between the two . * nr organ sound with Octave Shift. sounds may affectthe way in which the an s an This is not a malfunction. sounds are heard, but this is not a malfunction. With some music files, the lyrics cannot | Hi à noi a malfunction. _ be displayed correctly. In the Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges | This is not a malfunction. = Lyrics are not indicated properly | of the screen, and not be displayed. in the display À bution was pressed while the lyrics were being shown in the display. If you want to have the lyrics be During the display of lyrics, you could | displayed again, touch <Play> on the | p. 164 be taken to a different screen if you Rec/Play screen. press a button. The Touch Screen doesn't respond The positioning ofihe Touch Screen " may become displaced if some time Reposition the Touch screen. p- 229 correctly Lo has passed since it was last used Certain instrument are not heard | qe cck is muted. Turn off track muting. P. 168 while playing a song p- 170 As À æ& 7 E & @) 2] gon à use Chord ntligence Chord Intelligence is at OFF. Turn “Chord Intelligence” on. p.90 à nction In the Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges | This is not a malfunction. = of the screen, and not be displayed. The Notation display feature is Notation is not indicated properly particularly unsuitable for the display This is not a malfunction. p.173 in the display of difficult, complex musical works that demand accurate notation. IF you select a part that does not contain performance data, notes will | Change the part that is displayed. p- 172 not be displayed in the notation. Playing at loud volumes may cause instruments near the ATELIER to Use the following measures to suppress resonate. Resonance can also occur such resonance. with fluorescent light tubes, glass + Place speakers so they are 10-15 cm doors, and other objects. In particular, from walls and other surfaces. = " ds Odé this problem occurs more easily when | + Reduce the volume. us Bass sue Sounds Odd, or | ihe bass component is increased, and | + Move the speakers away from any ere Is a Vibrating Resonance | \/hen the sound is played at higher resonating objects. volumes. When listening through headphones: Here, a different cause (such as Consult your Roland dealer or nearest |" resonance produced by the ATELIER) | Roland Service Center. would be suspect.

IE AT-900_e.book 275 K— 2007Æ9A7H &HA F8#434 Troubleshooting Problem Check Solution Page Pressing the expression pedal while playing back ATELIER performance data produces a crackling noise The expression pedal function is set to "PEDAL+COMPOSER" during playback of ATELIER performance data. When this setting is used, moving the expression pedal while playing back ATELIER performance daïa may create a difference between the expression pedal information in the performance data and the volume as set with the expression pedal, which can result in this kind of sound being produced. Set the expression pedal function to "PEDAL during playback. p.212 Tempo not changing even when the source tempo is reselected {when arranging rhythms using the Rhythm Customize function) Auto Sid Tempo [Auto Standard Tempo) is set to on. When the Auto Sid Tempo setting is set to ON and rhythms are switched while the rhythm is stopped, the tempo is automatically set to the tempo for that rhythm. The tempo setting does not change automatically, even if the rhythms are switched with the Auto Std Tempo setting set to OFF and the rhythm stopped. Turn “Auto Std Tempo” off. p.215 Unable to save created rhythm to the User Memory “Memory Full” appears in the display. The available memory remaining in the ATELIER is not sufficient. First delete some other rhythm saved to the user memory, then save the rhythm you have created to the user memory once again. p. 207 p. 208 There is no sound from the twelve keys at the right of the lower keyboard The VAINK function is set Mode 2. When V-LINK setting is Mode 2, the group of twelve keys starting at the very right of the lower keyboard are used for controlling video images. Therefore, no sounds are played even when you press these keys. Turn the V-LINK function off, or select Mode 1 for the VLINK function. p.227 DVD volume is too low {or inaudible) Is the DVD player connected correcily? Connect the DVD player correcily. p. 258 Could the DVD PLAYER INPUT [VOLUME] knob be turned to the minimum position? The DVD players volume is adjusted with the DVD PLAYER INPUT [VOLUME] knob; not by the [VOLUME] knob. p. 258

IE AT-900_e.book 276 X—% 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#43 Error Message Error Message Meanings Copy Protected. . : Can't Save. To protect the copyright, this music file cannot be saved as SMF format. Write-Protected The protect tab of the storage media is set to the Protect [write prohibit] position.

Media. Move the tab to the Write [write permit) position and try the operation again. Can't Save : : This Song. You can only play the music data. It cannot be saved on a storage media Master Disk This storage media does not allow initialization or saving. Insert a different storage media and try the operation again. Read Only File. You cannot overwrite-save or delete a file on this storage media. No Media Storage media is not connected. Please connect storage media. Media Full Saving is not possible because the storage media does not have enough space. Please use other storage raru media that has been formatted by the ATELIER. Unknown Media This storage media cannot be used. Please format it. Media Ejected The storage media was disconnected while it was being accessed. Please try the operation again. Damaged Media | A damaged area Was found on he storage media. Can't Read This data cannot be read. Playback was halted because the song could not be read fast enough. Can't Play The song could not be read from the storage media fast enough for playback. Press the [Reset] button, then press the [Play/Stop] button once again. There is no rhythm in user memory. No Rhythm The rhythm used by the selected registration was deleted from user memory, or its order was changed. Designated When calibrating the touch panel, the appropriate point was not touched correcily. positions are IF you touch a location other than the specified point, the discrepancy may become severe. incorrect. Please be sure to touch the correct point. The song data is excessively large, and cannot be loaded. Memory Full The performance data is excessively large, and cannot be loaded. MIDI Buffer Full The ATELIER cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data sent from the external MIDI device. Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent to the ATELIER. Communication Error A MIDI cable or computer cable has been disconnected. Connect it properly and securely. Data transfer failed. Please transfer the data again. The ATELIER is unable to handle the data that was sent. Please send data that the ATELIER is able to handle. Memory Full Recording or editing is not possible because the memory of the ATELIER is full. Memory Error An error occurred in internal memory. Please perform the operation again. IFthis indication appears even after you've repeated the operation several times, please contact Roland service. Not found A rhythm or registration that meets the conditions was not found. This is registration data of a type that is not supported. This instrument cannot use this registration. USB over current USB memory not supported by the ATELIER was connected. This USB memory cannot be used with the ATELIER.

—+1@ ing just the key marked with the ”#."

CIE AT-900_e.book 278 X— 2007Æ9A7H &HA FA8#A 34 Chord List © symbol: Indicates the constituent not th an “x"can ing just the key marked with the "x." % symbol: Chord shown wi

ARTE (EAU ACTE (UTP CARTON CEE

IE AT-900_e.book 279 K— 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#43 ll Glossary Arrangement This refers to changes that have been made in an original tune, by adding a new accompaniment or by changing the instruments used. Automatic Accompaniment Automatic Accompaniment is automatic accompaniment when just a few keys in the lower section of the keyboard are pressed to specify the chord. Basic Chord This refers to the most commonly used types of chord, which are generally the following six types: major chords, minor chords, minor seventh chords, minor seventh (5] chords, dominant seventh chords, and diminished seventh chords. Chord Notes of wo or more pitches sounded simultaneously. Chords consisting of three notes are called “triads,” and are the most basic type of chord. Chorus An effect that adds spaciousness and richness to the sound. Ending This is the last part of the accompaniment. When you stop playing the Automatic Accompaniment, the ATELIER plays an Ending appropriate for the Rhythm. Glide An effect that temporarily lowers the pitch and then gradually returns it to normal. Intro This is the introductory portion of an Automatic Accompaniment performance. When automatic accompaniment begins, the ATELIER can add an appropriate intro for each rhythm. Inversion When the lowest note of a chord is the root, the chord is said to be in “root position.” In contrast, forms of a chord in which other notes are the lowest pitch are called “inversions."” Mute To silence a sound. The ATELIER provides a Track Mute function that allows you to turn off the track button indicator of a track on which music data has been recorded, so that the corresponding track will temporarily be silenced.

Settings such as sound selections, tempo, Rotary fast/slow. & Pitch Bend o An effect that smoothly raises or lowers the pitch. Ë Registration A set of data that specifies the state of the instrument when performing, including sounds and panel settings. Reverb An effect that simulates the reverberation of a room or concert hall. Root Note The root noie is the basis of a chord. AIl chords are built on a root note, which is the part of the chord name given in uppercase letters. Rotary An effect which simulates the modulation given to the sound when a rotating speaker is used. The Rotary effect produces two types of modulation: fast or slow. Sound Generator This is the section that produces the sound. The ATELIER series uses a sound generator that is compatible with GM2/GS. Split A function which allows the keyboard to be divided into two or more areas, and a different sound assigned to each area. The point at which the keyboard is divided is called the "Split Point.” Sustain An effect that adds a decay to each note. The ATELIER allows sustain to be applied to the voices of the upper part, lower part, and pedal part. Vibrato An effect that cyclically modulates the pitch. Voice The ATELIER is able to produce the sounds of various instruments. These sounds are called “Voices.”

IE AT-900_e.book 280 K— 2007#9A7H &HA F8#43 ll Music Files That the ATELIER Can Use What Are Music Files? Music files contains musical information such as how long the key for a corresponding pitch is played, the force applied to the key played, and other such information. Performance data is transmitted to the ATELIER from music files saved in USB memory and CD-ROM, and played back without change as songs. This is different than a audio CD, since the music file does not contain a recording of the sound itself. This makes it possible to change tempos and keys freely, allowing you to use it in many different ways. Regarding Copyright Use of the internal songs and audio files for any purpose other than private, personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law. Additionally, this data must not be copied, nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder. Please be aware that if you create derivative works that are based on existing copyrighted material, such as commercially available SMF music files, such works may violate copyright law if used for any purpose other than personal enjoyment. Roland takes no responsibility for any copyright violation you may commit by creating such works. M The ATELIER Allows You To Use the Following Music Files VIMATUNES VA TUNES VIMA TUNES is a Roland specification for music files that contains image and lyric data, allowing you to enjoy songs with lyrics and images simultaneously. When data bearing the “VIMA TUNES” logo is played back on a device that bears the same logo, lyrics can be shown on the screen of a connected external display or television, leting you enjoy karaoke or watch a slide show. SMF Music Files SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) use a standard format for music file that was formulated so that files containing music file could be widely compatible, regardless of the manufacturer of the listening device. An enormous variety of music is available, whether it be for listening, for practicing musical instruments, for Karaoke, etc. SMF with Lyrics SMF SMF with Lyrics” refers to SMF (Standard MIDI File] that contains the Iris. When Music Files carrying the “SMF with Lyrics” logo are played back on a compatible device [one bearing the same logo), the Ivrics will appear in its display. The ATELIER come equipped with GM 2/GS sound generators.

MH About the ATELIER Sound Generator The ATELIER come equipped with GM 2/GS sound generators. cenesa General MIDI MIDI The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs, and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices. Sound generating devices and music files that meets the General MIDI standard bears the General MIDI logo. Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical performance cenesaL General MIDI 2 MIA The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up where the original General MIDI left off, offering enhanced expressive capabilities, and even greater compatibility. Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations, such as how sounds are to be edited, and how effects should be handled, have now been precisely defined. Moreover, the available sounds have been expanded. General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo. In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which does not & include the new enhancements, is referred to as “General MIDI 1” as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2 GS Format Loi The GS Format is Roland's set of specifications for standardizing the performance of sound generating devices. In addition to including support for everything defined by the General MIDI, the highly compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of sounds, provides for the editing of sounds, and spells out many details for a wide range of extra features, including effects such as reverb and chorus. Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features when they arrive. Since it is upwardly compatible with the General MIDI, Roland's GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files (music files that have been created with the GS Format in mind). This product supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS Format, and can be used to play back music data carrying either of these logos. XGlite AT XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation, that defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the structure and type of effects, in addition to the General MIDI 1 specification XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone generation format. You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some music files may play back differently compared to the original files, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects.

Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off Arranger Update Aspect Ratio Auto Std Tempo [Auto Standard Tempo] Aux Out Mode D Beam Sensitivity Display Brighiness Exp. Curve [Expression Curve] Lyrics Main Background Main Bouncing Ball Master Tune Metronome Sound Mic Echo MIDI IN Mode NTSC/PAL Regist Shift (Registration Shift} Remote Control Remote Control: FUNCI, 2 Rhythm Mode Rotary Color Rotary Speed Send PC Switch Trans. Update [Transpose Update] USB Driver Registration Name Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons Registration Name Regist Shift (Registration Shift} Arranger Update Trans. Update [Transpose Update] Exp. Curve [Expression Curve] Settings That Are Stored In the Individual Registration Buttons Reverb Type Reverb Depth Solo [To Lower] button (ON/OFF] Pedal [To Lower] button (ON/OFF) Transpose [:] [+] button (Key Transpose) L Foot Switch Assignment (Left Foot Switch Assignmeni] R Foot Switch Assignment [Right Foot Switch Assignmeni] Damper Pedal (Damper Pedal Assignment] [Harmony Intelligence] butions (ON/OFF) Harmony Intelligence Type Rotary [Fast/Slow] button [ON/OFF) Rotary [On/Off] button (ON/OFF) Bender/Vibrato Pitch Bend Range Pedal Bass Mode Solo Mode Solo To Lower Mode Solo Split Point [Bass Splif] button (ON/OFF) Bass Split Point Sustain ON/OFF Sustain Length Tx MIDI Channel After Touch ON/OFF After Touch Sens [After Touch Sensitivity] Initial Touch (Initial Touch Sensitivity] Vintage Organ Type Vintage Flute Volume PC Number (Program Change Number) Bank LSB (Bank Select LSB] Bank MSB (Bank Select MSB) Wall Type The Voices assigned for each part Level [ A ][ Y ] (Part Balance Volume) The Reverb depth for each part The Chorus settings (ON/OFF) for each part The Octave settings for each part The voices assigned to the [Others] buttons for each part [Drums/SFX] button [ON/OFF) Drum/SFX Set [Manual Percussion] button (ON/OFF) Manual Percussion Set Selected Rhythm [Intro] button (ON/OFF] [Ending] button (ON/OFF) [Sync Start] button (ON/OFF) Variation Chord Intelligence ON/OFF Chord Hold ON/OFF Leading Bass ON/OFF Arranger [ON/OFF] button (ON/OFF) Lower Voice [Hold] button (ON/OFF] Tempo setting Volume of the rhythm Accompaniment part Reverb depth of the rhythm Accompaniment part Volume of the rhythm drum part Reverb depth of the rhythm drum part Volume of the rhythm bass part Reverb depth of the rhythm bass part

CIE AT-900_e.book 282 X—% 2007Æ#9A7H &HA F8#43 Roland Organ Date: July 1, 2007 Model AT-900, AT-900C MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.00 Function. Transmitted Recognized Remarks Basic Default 1 (Solo) 1 (Solo) +5 Channel 2 [Pedal) 2 (Pedal) +5 3 (Lower) 3 (Lower) +5 4 (Upper) 4 (Upper) +5 11 (Drums/SFX) 11 (Drums/SFX) +5 13 (Manual Percussion) 13 (Manual Percussion] *5 16 (Expression, PC, VAINK) 16 (Expression) *5 1-16 (GM2/GS) “6 Changed 1-16 x Default x Mode 3 Mode Messages x Mode 3, 41M=1] *10 Altered sense Note 24-110 0-127 Number: True Voice PONS ETENE 0-127 ; Note ON o "1 Jo Velocity Note OFF x_ 8n v=64 x After Key's x o *2,8 Touch Ch's x o *2,7,8,9 Pitch Bend x o 2,7,8,9 0,32| 0 “1 Jo *3,7,8 | Bank select 1lx ] *2,7, 8,9] Modulation 5| x (e] *2,7,8 Poriamento time 6,38| x [e] *2,7, 8, 9| Data entry 7x Oo *2,7, 8, 9| Volume 10! x ] *3,7, 8, 9] Panpot Control no © *3,7, 8, 9| Expression Change 16] x © *4 General purpose controller (Gide) &4| 0 Oo *3,7,8,9| Hold 1 65 | x O *3,7,8 Portamento À 66 | x O *2,7,8 | Sostenuto 7 @ 67 | x Oo *2,7,8 | Soft @ 71 x Oo *7 Resonance 72] x ] *7 Release Time 73 | x © *7 Attack Time ZA | x Oo *7 Cut off 75| x Oo *7 Decay Time 76| x ] *7 Vibrato Time 77 | x O +7 Vibrato Depth 84 x (e] *2,8 Poriamento control ax Oo *3,7,8 | Effectl depih 93 | x ] *3,7,8 | Effect3 depih 98,99 | x © *3,8 NRPN LSB, MSB 100, 101 | x Q *2,7,8,9| RPN LSB, MSB Prog 0-127 “1 Jo 3,7,8,9 Change : True # AARERNERER IEEE 0-127 Program number 1-128 System Exclusive o *1o : Song Pos x x ÿriem : Song Sel x x ommon : Tune x x System : Clock Q x RealTime : Commands o x : Al sound off x © (120, 126, 127] *7, 8 À : Reset all controllers | x [e] *7,8 ve : Local Control x x Message : AÏLNotes OFF | x O© (123-125) *7, 8,9 : Active Sense o o : Reset x x Not *1 Ox is selectable. * 7 Received in GM2 mode tes *2 O xis selectable by SysEx. (GS Part) # 8 Received in GS mode

• 3 Not received in the keyboard part * 9 Received in General MIDI mode
• 4 Can be received in the keyboard part * 10 Recognize as M=1 even if M#1.
• 5 With MIDI IN Mode 2 * 11 VUNK

• All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws. *_No data for the music that is played will be output from MIDI Out connector.

Demo Song List Profile Akio Sasaki After graduating from the Berklee College of Music in Boston as a principle, Akio has been active as a top jazz organ player in Japan. He performs live throughout the country, and also teaches at the Senzoku Gakuen College of Music and at the Kyoto Musical Academy. Additionally, he has published numerous arrangements, works of music theory, and music education books. In 2005 he released his own trio's CD album “Glide in Blue,” receiving high praise not only from organ fans but also from many jazz fans. In 2007 he released his new album “Fly by Night,” and his musical career continues to expand. Hector Olivera Hector Olivera was born in Argentina. He received his education at the Conservatory and the University of Buenos Aires followed by a scholarship at the famous Juilliard School of Music in New York. Olivera has performed extensively throughout the world including concerts at prestigious places such as the Notre Dame Cathedral in Paris and Carnegie Hall in New York. Hector Olivera’s expertise involves both the traditional pipe organ and the electronic organ. Presently Olivera tours internationally playing some of the world's most magnificent pipe organs as well as his preferred electronic organ, the Roland ATELIER for which he continues to collaborate with its development. Ralf Schink Ralf Schink was born in Germany and began playing the electronic organ at the age of 9. After completing his formal education Ralf went on to study at the renowned Swiss Jazz School in Bern, Switzerland as well as the Berklee College of Music in Boston. Since then, his energetic, contemporary style has won him many accolades throughout Europe and around the world. Ralf regularly performs at the Frankfurt Musik Messe, the largest musical fair in Europe. À tremendously versatile and gifted musician, Ralf is comfortable with all types of music. From pop to jazz, Ralf's repertoire appels to all age groups. Since 1992 Ralf has been working and touring for Roland Europe as demonstrator and product consultant. He regularly tours Europe, Asia and Canada. Ric lannone

Ric lannone began playing the piano and accordion at the age of two and a half. By the time he was seven, he was performing public and private engagements with his musician father. For more than 20 years Ric has performed and traveled extensively throughout the United States and Europe, delighting audiences with his unique playing style and music arrangements. He is equally comfortable playing the organ, piano or keyboard, as a concert artist and product demonstrator.

Demo Song List Tony Fenelon Tony Fenelon studied at the Conservatory of Music in Melbourne, Australia under famed teacher Roy Shepard. An internationally acclaimed artist, Tony has completed eighteen major concert tours overseas including the United States, U.K. and Japan. He has released seventeen albums, including four gold records. Tony has also been featured regularly as a solo pianist with the Australian Philharmonic Orchestra and the Australian Pops Orchestra. In June of 2003, Tony learned that he had been awarded the distinction of “Organist for the Year 2002” by the American Theatre Organ Society, and 2004 was awarded the distinction of the Medal of the Order of Australia in Queen Elizabeth's Birthday Honours List for his contributions in music. seoipuoddy 1511 Buos oweq Yuri Tachibana Although Yuri Tachibana began playing the piano at age 3, she switched completely to the organ after winning First Prize in an organ competition. She has expanded her work to include a variety of activities, releasing two albums on Columbia Records and performing organ regularly on the “11 PM" TV program for four years. She further contributes articles on a wide range of musical genres, including classical and jazz, is an accomplished arranger, and has published numerous scores. In 2002, King Records released Yuri’s album “Organ Chat,” all songs of which were performed and recorded using the Roland Organ Music ATELIER. The album was acclaimed for its unique arrangements and sure playing, prompting the release of “Organ Chat 2" in 2005. Currently, her musical activities range beyond Japan to include the United States, Europe, China, and Southeast Asia, and she has appeared on numerous CDs from King Records and other record companies as a

CIE AT-900_e.book 286 X— 2007#9A7H &HA F8#43 Short Cut List Quick Guide Function Short Cut Screen/Setting Expression Pedal Controller screen/Exp. Curve [Expression Curve) [Bender/Vibrato] lever Controller screen/Bender/Vibrato Upper Keyboard Upper Keyboard screen/After Touch Lower Keyboard Split Point screen Pedalboard Pedalboard screen/Pedal Bass Mode Controller screen/ L Foot Switch (Left Foot Switch} R Foot Switch {Right Foot Switch) Left Foot Switch Right Foot Switch Damper Pedal Controller screen/Damper Pedal [Solo To Lower] button Split Point screen [Bass Split] button Split Point screen Sustain [Pedal] button Pedalboard screen/Sustain Length Rotary [On/Of] button Effect screen/Rotary Color While the Quick Guide à screen is displayed, Rotary [Slow/Fast] button Effect screen/Rotary Speed Ÿ [Count Down] button Rhythm Options screen/Count Down Sound Upper Voice select buttons Solo Voice select buttons Upper Keyboard screen [Aliernate] button Lower Voice select buttons [Alermate buton Lower Keyboard screen Pedal Voice select buttons Pedalboard screen Registration [Write] button Registration Options screen/Arranger Update screen [One Touch Program] Factory Reset screen button u [Harmony Intelligence] Panel Reset screen buttons Song Clear screen [Song] button If the performance data has never been saved to a USB memory or “Favorites,” the Song Clear screen appears.)

AT-900C ë Upper 56 keys (C3 - G7] £ Lower 76 keys (Waïerfall keyboard, E1 - G7] È Option Ë Keyboard | Pedal 25 keys (C2 - C4) PK-25A: 25 keys (C2 - C4) ë PK-7A: 20 keys (C2 - G3] Initial Touch Upper, Lower [10 levels for each] After Touch Upper [10 levels) Conforms to GENERAL MIDI Level 2, GENERAL MIDI System, Sound Generator | GS and XG lite format Max.Polyphony | 384 Voice 450 Voices [included 4 Articulation Voices and 31 Active Expression Voices) Sound Upper Part Organ, Symphonie, Orchestral Generator Lower Part Organ, Symphonie, Orchestral Solo Part Solo À Pedal Part Organ, Orchestral Ÿ Vintage Organ | Flute [with harmonic bars), Pipe, Thealer Rhythm 300 rhythms in 10 groups x 4 variations Rhythm User Rhythm 99 rhythms Rhythm Customize | Pattern editing of the internal rhythms(Drum Set, Beat, Tempo, Note] Tempo, Arranger On/Of, Start/Stop, Sync Start, Intro, Ending, Intro Count Down, Break, Auto Fill In, Variation (4 variations], One Touch Program, Chord Intelligence, Chord Hold, Leading Bass, Auto Standard Tempo, Rhythm Mode Arranger Function Music Assistant 700 titles x 4 variations One Touch Program 300 rhythms x 2 groups x 4 variations Quick Registration 216 settings in 11 groups Drums/SFX Sets 18 Drum Sets + 1 SFX Set Manual Percussion Sets 14 sets Harmony Intelligence 36 types Master Tuning 415.3 Hz - 466.2 Hz (0.1 Hz steps] Key Transpose -4 - +7 [in semitones) Playback Transpose -6-+5 [in semitones) Effects Rotary Sound, Chorus, RSS Reverb, Sustain, Vibrato, Pitch Bend, Glide Registration 12 memories Registration Function Load Next, File Edit

Main Specifications | AT-900C Tracks 7 tracks Note Storage Approx. 40,000 notes Song Length Max. 999 measures Composer Tempo Quarter note = 20 - 500 Resolution 120 ticks per quarter note Recording Realime [Replace, Punch In/Out, Loop] Edit Function Delete Measure, Delete Track, Erase, Copy, Quantize Score Display DigiScore (Great Staff, G Clef Staff, F Clef Staff, with note name, with Lyrics} Media USB flash memory, floppy disk (in the case of using optional USB floppy disk drive FD-01A) File Storage | Se Format MUSIC ATELIER original format, SMF format O Songs Max. 99 songs for each folder Rated Power Output 10W + 10 W+ 60 W + 60 W + 100 W | 80 W+ 80 W Twester 5 cm x 4 5 cm x 2 Fulkrange (small) | 8 cm x 2 8 cm x 2 Speaker | Fulkrange (large) | 16 cm x 4 RL ® Woofer 30 cmx1 20 mx & Display Graphic 800 x 480 dois backlit color LCD with touch screen Pedals, Switches Damper Pedal, Expression Pedal, Foot Switch: 2 pes. [on the expression pedal, function assignable) {attached to the optional pedalboard PK- 25A, PK-7A) Damper Pedal, Expression Pedal, Foot Switch: 2 pes. [on the expression pedal, function assignable) Audio Output Jacks |L/mono, R), Aux/Drums Output Jacks (L/mono, R], Bass Output Jack {mono}, Audio Input Jacks [L/mono, R], External Input Jacks (Camera, DVD Player In, Video Output Jacks (Analog RGB, Video], Phones Jacks (stereo) x 2, Mic Input Jack, Ext In), Connectors MIDI connectors (In, Out}, USB {MIDI} Jack, External Memory connector (USB Flash Memory connector], Ext Drive connector, AC Inlet Balanced Audio Output (L, RJ, PK In connector Power Supply AC 117 V, 230 V, 240 V Power Consumption 420 W 220 W Finish Satin Walnut Polished Cherry

• In fhe interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.

Computer … DVD Player Portable Audio/Video Player Video Camera Copying Measure Performance Song Registration Rhythm Rhythms on Disks into User Memory Correct Timing Count Down . Count Down Sound Count In … Count-n Recording .

D Beam Controller D Beam Controller sensitivity Damper Pedal Decay …… Delete Graphic Measure Performance Songs Registrations Rhythms Stored in User Memory Track … Demo Song Demo Song List Depth Expression Pedal Disk Rhythm Drums/SFX Drums/SFX Sets DVD … [DVD] button DVD Player … Connecting DVD Player In

Leading Bass . Load Individual Registration . 117 Performance Songs Set of Registrations Load Next Registrations Loop Recording Lower Hold . 80 Lower Voice , 80 Lyrics …

Each Part Separately . Performance . Re-Recording Recording onto SMF Regist Shift . Registration Arranger Update . Main Screen Recall . Rename Storing Registrations Remote Control Rename Performance Song Registration .… Saved Rhythms ReRecording . Reverb ……. Reverb Effect . Depth of the Reverb Reverb Type Wall Type RGB . Rhythm Count Down . Customize filkin Main Screen … One Touch Program Rhythm Mode Rotary Rotary Effect Rotary Color Rotary Speed 134,141

Connecting Format Tempo .. Touch Screen Tr. Mute (Track Muie] Track Delete . Track Button Track Mute .. Transpose Key Transpose Main Screen Play Transpose . Transpose Update . Tx MIDI Ch. (MIDI Transmit Channel . Type of Slide Show

É . RE FE T-LE AAA PRE AU An, 10 RENARD, PR PPT AO AT SA AUS LEA EEYS BRORGEF ALU LEE PT a (FE GENS 5, it, AR DÉERE, KE SCA TOUS ÉOSEES

CIE AT-900_e.book 296 X— 2007#9A7H &HA F8#439 r For EU Countries — ( € This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC. For the USA— This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmiul interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the L interference by one or more of the following measures: &} — Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. h —_ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. — Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. — Consul the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment. This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit. L J f For Canada— This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. Ne ) For the USA Compliance Information Statement Model Name : AT-900, AT-900C Type of Equipment : Digital Organ Responsible Party : Roland Corporation U.S. Address : 5100 S. Eastern Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938 Telephone : (823) 800-3700 L J DUO 04892245 07-09-1N